213800RS21X7UUH5QU252021-01-012021-12-31iso4217:GBP213800RS21X7UUH5QU252020-01-012020-12-31213800RS21X7UUH5QU252021-12-31213800RS21X7UUH5QU252020-12-31213800RS21X7UUH5QU252019-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252019-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252019-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252019-12-31ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252019-12-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252019-12-31213800RS21X7UUH5QU252020-01-012020-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252020-01-012020-12-31ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252020-01-012020-12-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252020-01-012020-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252020-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252020-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252020-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252020-12-31ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252020-12-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252021-01-012021-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252021-01-012021-12-31ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252021-01-012021-12-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252021-01-012021-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252021-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252021-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252021-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252021-12-31ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember213800RS21X7UUH5QU252021-12-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember
HBOS plc
Report and Accounts
2021
Member of Lloyds Banking Group
Registered Office: The Mound, Edinburgh EH1 1YZ. Registered in Scotland No. SC218813
HBOS plc
Contents
Principal activities
HBOS plc (the Company) and its subsidiaries (together, the Group) provide a wide range of banking and financial services.
The Group’s revenue is earned through interest and fees on a broad range of financial services products including current and savings accounts,
personal loans, credit cards and mortgages within the retail market and loans and other products to commercial and corporate customers.
Business review
Income statement
The Group’s profit before tax for the year to 31 December 2021 was £2,271 million, whilst total profit for the year was £1,844 million. Both
measures benefited from higher total income and an impairment credit due to the improved macroeconomic outlook for the UK.
Total income of £5,747 million was up 4 per cent on the prior year reflecting both higher net interest income and other income.
Net interest income of £5,386 million was up 2 per cent compared to 2020, benefiting from an increase in average interest-earning assets which
was driven by growth in the Group's mortgage book.
Other income of £361 million was 52 per cent higher than in the prior year, reflecting net trading income in the year of £56 million compared to
net trading losses of £321 million in 2020, partly offset by a significant reduction in other operating income which was £24 million in 2021
compared to £333 million in 2020. Net trading income in 2021 benefited from the non-recurrence of losses incurred in 2020 on hedging
arrangements entered into with fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings, whilst other operating income reduced due to the non-recurrence
of gains of £221 million recognised in 2020 relating to liability management.
Operating expenses of £3,850 million were 44 per cent higher than in 2020, primarily as a result of a significantly higher charge for regulatory
and legal provisions. The charge for regulatory and legal provisions increased to £982 million in the year which included redress and operational
costs in respect of HBOS Reading and litigation costs and charges relating to other ongoing legacy programmes. During 2021, £790 million has
been recognised in relation to HBOS Reading estimated future awards and operational costs, of which £600 million was recognised in the fourth
quarter. This reflects the Group's estimate of its full liability and includes the expected future cost in relation to the independent Foskett Panel
re-review, operational costs in relation to Dame Linda Dobbs' review which is considering whether the issues relating to HBOS Reading were
investigated and appropriately reported by the Group during the period January 2009 to January 2017 and other programme costs. The final
outcome could be significantly different once the re-review is concluded.
The impairment charge was a credit of £374 million in the year, compared to a charge of £1,621 million in 2020. The credit in 2021 was the result
of the release of expected credit loss (ECL) allowances based upon improvements to the macroeconomic outlook for the UK. Overall the
Group's loan portfolio continues to be well-positioned, reflecting a prudent through-the-cycle approach to credit risk with high levels of
security. Observed credit performance has remained robust in the year, with the flow of assets into arrears, defaults and write-offs remaining at
low levels. The Group's ECL allowance reduced over the 12 months to 31 December 2021 by £692 million to £2,638 million.
The Group recognised a tax expense of £427 million for the year, which included a credit of £420 million arising on the remeasurement of
deferred tax assets following the announcement and subsequent substantive enactment by the UK Government that the corporation tax rate
would increase from 19 per cent to 25 per cent on 1 April 2023.
Balance sheet
The Group’s balance sheet reflects continued franchise growth throughout the year. Total assets of £310,119 million were up 3 per cent
compared to £301,864 million at 31 December 2020 as a result of an increase in loans and advances to customers which was partly offset by
reductions in amounts due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings. Loans and advances to customers were 6 per cent higher at
£279,409 million compared to £263,766 million at 31 December 2020 driven by growth in the Group's mortgage book. Amounts due from fellow
Lloyds Banking Group undertakings reduced by £4,671 million from £19,852 million at 31 December 2020 due to increased settlement activity.
Total liabilities of £294,530 million were up 2 per cent compared to £287,998 million at 31 December 2020 driven by higher levels of customer
deposits and repurchase agreements which were partly offset by reductions in amounts due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings.
Customer deposits of £170,777 million have increased by £7,776 million since the end of 2020, with continued inflows into the Group's trusted
brands. This included personal current account growth, as a result of continued reduced levels of customer spending. Amounts due to fellow
Lloyds Banking Group undertakings have fallen by £12,165 million in the year as the Group drew additional funds from the Term Funding
Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs (TFSME) which were reflected in repurchase agreements present at the year-end.
Total equity increased by £1,723 million from £13,866 million at 31 December 2020 to £15,589 million at 31 December 2021 with total
comprehensive income for the year of £2,297 million and capital contributions received of £36 million, partially offset by dividends paid of
£501 million and distributions to non-controlling interests of £109 million.
The post-tax return on average assets was 0.6 per cent compared to 0.3 per cent in 2020.
Capital
Neither the Company nor the Group are regulated from a capital perspective. Regulatory capital is instead managed in the Company’s principal
banking subsidiary, Bank of Scotland plc.
Future developments
Information about future developments is provided within the principal risks and uncertainties section below.
Reflecting the needs of stakeholders in Board decisions
The Board is responsible for the long-term success of the Company, setting and overseeing culture, purpose, values and strategy. The Board’s
understanding of stakeholders’ interests is central to these responsibilities, and informs key aspects of Board decision-making.
Acknowledging the breadth of the Company’s stakeholders and the size of the organisation, stakeholder engagement takes place at a number
of levels. In addition to direct engagement by members of the Board, the Board considers the stakeholder impacts of all proposals submitted to
it from across the Company. Stakeholder interests are central to the Board’s delegation of the management of the business to the Executive.
In turn the Executive, including the Group Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer, routinely provide the Board with details of non-Board
stakeholder interaction and feedback through their regular business updates. Stakeholder interests are also identified by the Executive for
consideration in all other proposals put to the Board.
Interaction has again mostly been undertaken virtually this year where necessary, in compliance with the government’s COVID-19 requirements.
HBOS plc
Strategic report
1
Section 172(1) Statement
In accordance with the Companies Act 2006 (the Act), the Directors provide this statement describing how they have had regard to the matters
set out in section 172(1) of the Act, when performing their duty to promote the success of the Company under section 172. Further details on
key actions are also contained within the Corporate Governance Statement on page 6.
The Directors remain mindful in all their deliberations of the long-term consequences of their decisions, as well as the importance of the
Company maintaining a reputation for high standards of business conduct and the Board engaging with, and taking account of the views of, key
stakeholders.
Key Stakeholder Engagement
The Non-Executive Directors undertook an engagement programme which allowed them to hear directly from customers, clients and
colleagues, to help understand what matters in their lives, the role the Company plays in supporting them and how the Company is performing
in that regard. A range of activities took place, which will extend into 2022, including meeting with customers, attending client visits and sitting
with colleagues to understand the Company’s culture and discuss future ways of working. The Non-Executive Directors found these sessions to
be of great benefit, giving many valuable insights which they take account of, as appropriate, in their decision-making.
Our Stakeholders
Customers
The Board remains committed to understanding and addressing our customers’ needs, which is vital to setting and achieving the Company's
goals. Examples of Board engagement with customers included:
Regular Board updates identifying key areas of customer concern, covering a range of internal and external measures including customer
indices and market share updates
These regular updates gave valuable insight into performance in delivering on customer-related objectives, on improving customer
outcomes and in determining where further action was required
The Group Chief Executive attended customer engagement events, an important opportunity for customers to raise any concerns directly
Shareholders
The Company is a wholly owned subsidiary of Lloyds Banking Group. The Directors ensure that the strategy, priorities, processes and practices
of the Company are fully aligned where required to those of Lloyds Banking Group, ensuring that the interests of Lloyds Banking Group as the
Company's sole shareholder are duly acknowledged. Further information in respect of the relationship of Lloyds Banking Group with its
shareholders is included within the Strategic Report within the Lloyds Banking Group Annual Report and Accounts for 2021, available on the
Lloyds Banking Group website.
Colleagues
Colleagues are central to the delivery of strategy and ambitions and this is recognised by the Board in its engagement with colleagues
throughout the year. In 2021, the Board reviewed how it engages with the workforce and decided that the Responsible Business Committee
should be the designated body for the Board’s engagement with the workforce, creating a dedicated resource of Non-Executive Directors,
while retaining a commitment for the whole Board to continue to engage with colleagues. The Responsible Business Committee reports
regularly to the Board on all of its activities, including colleague engagement.
The Board will continue to consider its arrangements in engagement with the workforce to ensure the arrangements remain effective and
continue to give a meaningful understanding of the views of the workforce and to encourage dialogue between the Board and the workforce.
Examples of Board engagement included:
Consideration by the Responsible Business Committee of regular workforce engagement updates, covering key themes raised by
colleagues, trends on people matters and updates on colleague sentiment
A further annual report summarising engagement activity, key themes and issues raised during the year
Consideration of the outcomes of surveys completed by colleagues, including annual and ad hoc surveys, and review of progress in
addressing the matters colleagues raised
Board member attendance at a range of business area leadership meetings, Community Calls and colleague network events
Informal colleague dinners and breakfast meetings were held by the Group Chief Executive
Town Hall sessions hosted by both the Chair and the Group Chief Executive with Board member attendance, complemented by
engagement sessions led by other senior leaders, with feedback shared with the wider Board
During the year the Company communicated directly with colleagues detailing performance, changes in the economic and regulatory
environment and updates on key strategic initiatives. Meetings were held throughout the year between the Company and our recognised
unions. Given improved Bank performance in 2021, Group Performance Share awards were approved for colleagues. Colleagues are eligible to
participate in HMRC-approved share plans which promote share ownership by giving employees an opportunity to invest in Lloyds Banking
Group shares.
Society and environment
The Board places great importance on engagement and action to help these communities prosper, and to help build a more sustainable and
inclusive future. Engagement with communities, and as relevant to environmental considerations included:
Dedicated updates on climate, environmental, social and governance related matters, covering all aspects of the Company’s business, and
the Board reviews progress against any action it considers is required
The Board is supported in environmental matters by its Responsible Business Committee, which considers stakeholder views on all matters
relating to the Group’s goals to be a trusted, sustainable, inclusive and responsible business
The Board continues to value the support of Lloyds Banking Group’s regional colleague ambassadors, who help in establishing strong
relationships with local politicians, councils and other community institutions across the UK
HBOS plc
Strategic report
2
Regulators and government
The Board continues to maintain strong and open relationships with our regulators and government authorities, including key stakeholders such
as HMRC and HM Treasury. Relevant engagement included:
The Chair and individual Directors, in particular the Chairs of the Board’s committees, held continuing discussions with the FCA and PRA on
a number of aspects of the regulatory agenda
The Board regularly reviewed updates on wider regulatory interaction, providing a view of key areas of regulatory focus, and also progress
made in addressing key regulatory priorities
A meeting was held between the Board and the PRA to discuss the outcome and progress of action relevant to the PRA’s Periodic Summary
Meeting letter
Suppliers
The Group relies on a number of partners for important aspects of our operations and customer service provision. The Board recognises the
importance of these relationships, and engagement with suppliers included:
The Board continues to have zero tolerance towards modern slavery in the supply chain, and receives updates on ongoing enhancements to
the Group’s supplier practices, including measures to address the risk of human trafficking and modern slavery in our wider supply chain
Key Decisions
Climate change
Investors, customers, regulators & government and society & environment
The Board remains committed to the ambitious climate change goals set for Lloyds Banking Group in 2020, including reducing the emissions
we finance by more than 50 per cent by 2030 and achieving net zero by 2050 or sooner, with a number of key steps already having been taken in
this regard, under the Board’s supervision. The Board has also given much consideration to progress against these objectives, and during the
year oversaw a number of additional commitments to further drive progress.
These included three new pledges specifically relevant to operations, ranging from further reducing our own carbon footprint with targets for
reduced emissions and energy use in respect of buildings and colleague travel, and related collaboration with key stakeholders including our
suppliers. Progress against all of related initiatives and activities continues to be closely monitored by the Board. Climate ambitions and related
stakeholder interests have also been a key consideration for the Board during the course of the year in the development of purpose and
strategy.
Further information on our progress in meeting climate ambitions can be found in Lloyds Banking Group's supplementary 2021 Climate Report.
Ways of working and culture
Colleagues and suppliers
Transforming ways of working has been a key priority for the Board, as colleagues have continued to adjust to the changes necessitated by the
COVID-19 pandemic, which have now resulted in fundamental changes in how people work. The Board recognised the importance of reacting
to these changes as they evolved during the year, and oversaw a multiphase transition to new ways of working, acknowledging both external
change and colleague sentiment.
The Board has overseen the development of an ‘activity led’ approach to hybrid working, recognising that the diverse nature of jobs within the
Company and the colleagues who fulfil them, means that a ‘one size fits all’ approach to hybrid working would not be appropriate. The Board
has focused on ensuring the overarching vision for future ways of working remained grounded in evolving values and behaviours by adopting a
‘test and learn’ approach, prioritising colleague safety and wellbeing throughout.
The Board understands that both the physical and technological workplace need to change to align to colleague needs now and in the future. It
has supported the acceleration of activity under the Future Workplace programme to transform office work spaces and deploy modern
workplace technology enablers for new ways of working.
In addition, the Board has continued to oversee initiatives to implement cultural change through the Lloyds Banking Group culture plan. This
plan covers areas including career progression, simplification of processes and ensuring colleagues are given the opportunity to continually
develop their skills to meet the changing needs of our customers. It is continually developed based on both colleague feedback and in
response to external events.
Strategy
Investors, colleagues, regulators & government and society & environment
As implementation of Strategic Review 2021 completed, and our new Group Chief Executive joined the organisation in August, the Board
considered that this was the appropriate time to revisit the strategy for the coming years, ensuring that the focus remained on our central
purpose of Helping Britain Prosper.To that end, under the Board’s guidance, the Group Chief Executive led a process of reviewing the strategic
priorities.
The development of the new strategy drew on the customer insights the Company and Board gathers through regular surveys and interactions
with our customers, feedback from bi-annual colleague surveys, and proactive regular engagement with our regulators and other stakeholders.
The Company also sought feedback on specific aspects of the strategy development, such as the new mission, through colleague surveys and
interactive sessions, as well as targeted customer and client research.
In addition to regular sessions, the Board held a number of dedicated sessions with senior management during the development of the
strategy, allowing both reflection on stakeholder feedback and input from Board members on key aspects of the development of the strategy.
This included the requirement for the strategy to be driven by our purpose, ensuring focus on meeting customer needs in a conduct-friendly
manner, and moving the business to more sustainable growth.
The Board will continue to take the invaluable feedback and views of its stakeholders into consideration as the new strategy is implemented,
ensuring we stay true to our commitments to meeting the needs of all our stakeholders.
HBOS plc
Strategic report
3
Principal risks and uncertainties
The significant risks faced by the Group are detailed below.
Despite a resilient recovery, 2021 has been another year of significant uncertainty, with COVID-19 accelerating broad structural changes,
including ways of working and impacts to global and domestic economies.
COVID-19 has continued to have a significant impact on all risk types in 2021. Understanding and managing its impacts dynamically has
remained a major area of focus. The Group has responded quickly to the challenges faced, putting in place risk mitigation strategies and
refining its investment and strategic plans.
Some of the emerging risk themes in 2021, that may require consideration as part of future strategic planning, include: technology; people,
ways of working and skills; climate change and sustainability and future purpose and propositions.
The Group’s principal risks and uncertainties are reviewed and reported regularly to the Board of Lloyds Banking Group in alignment with
Lloyds Banking Group’s enterprise risk management framework.
Market
Market risk is defined as the risk that the Group's capital or earnings profile is affected by adverse market rates or prices, in particular interest
rates and credit spreads in both the Banking business and the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes.
Credit
Credit risk is defined as the risk that parties with whom the Group has contracted fail to meet their financial obligations (both on and off-
balance sheet).
Funding and liquidity
Funding risk is defined as the risk that the Group does not have sufficiently stable and diverse sources of funding or the funding structure is
inefficient. Liquidity risk is defined as the risk that the Group has insufficient financial resources to meet its commitments as they fall due, or can
only secure them at excessive cost.
Capital
Capital risk is defined as the risk that the Group has a sub-optimal quantity or quality of capital or that capital is inefficiently deployed across
Lloyds Banking Group.
Change/execution
Change/execution risk is defined as the risk that, in delivering its change agenda, the Group fails to ensure compliance with laws and regulation,
maintain effective customer service and availability, and/or operate within Lloyds Banking Group’s risk appetite.
Conduct
Conduct risk is defined as the risk of customer detriment across the customer lifecycle including: failures in product management, distribution
and servicing activities; from other risks materialising, or other activities which could undermine the integrity of the market or distort
competition, leading to unfair customer outcomes, regulatory censure, reputational damage or financial loss.
Data
Data risk is defined as the risk of the Group failing to effectively govern, manage and control its data (including data processed by third party
suppliers), leading to unethical decisions, poor customer outcomes, loss of value to the Group and mistrust.
People
People risk is defined as the risk that the Group fails to provide an appropriate colleague and customer-centric culture, supported by robust
reward and wellbeing policies and processes; effective leadership to manage colleague resources; effective talent and succession management;
and robust control to ensure all colleague-related requirements are met.
Operational resilience
Operational resilience risk is defined as the risk that the Group fails to design resilience into business operations, underlying infrastructure and
controls (people, process, technology) so that it is able to withstand external or internal events which could impact the continuation of
operations, and fails to respond in a way which meets customer and stakeholder expectations and needs when the continuity of operations is
compromised.
Operational
Operational risk is defined as the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or from external events.
Model
Model risk is defined as the risk of financial loss, regulatory censure, reputational damage or customer detriment, as a result of deficiencies in
the development, application or ongoing operation of models and rating systems.
Regulatory and legal
Regulatory and legal risk is defined as the risk of financial penalties, regulatory censure, criminal or civil enforcement action or customer
detriment as a result of failure to identify, assess, correctly interpret, comply with, or manage regulatory and/or legal requirements.
Strategic
Strategic risk is defined as the risk which results from: incorrect assumptions about internal or external operating environments, failure to
understand the potential impact of strategic responses and business plans on existing risk types and failure to respond or the inappropriate
strategic response to material changes in the external or internal operating environments.
Climate
Climate risk is defined as the risk that the Group experiences losses and/or reputational damage as a result of physical events, transition risk, or
as a consequence of the responses to managing these changes, either directly or through our customers.
HBOS plc
Strategic report
4
Financial risk management objectives and policies
Information regarding the financial risk management objectives and policies of the Group, in relation to the use of financial instruments, is given
in notes 33 and 36 to the accounts. The Group’s approach to risk management including risk policies, risk appetite, measurement bases and
sensitivities, in particular for credit risk, market risk and liquidity risk, is aligned to those of Lloyds Banking Group plc, the Company’s ultimate
parent. Further information can be found in the Lloyds Banking Group plc Annual Report and Accounts.
The Group maintains risk management systems and internal controls relating to the financial reporting processes designed to:
ensure that accounting policies are appropriately and consistently applied;
enable the calculation, preparation and reporting of financial outcomes in line with applicable standards; and
ensure that disclosures are made on a timely basis in accordance with statutory and regulatory requirements.
The 2021 Strategic Report has been approved by the Board of Directors.
On behalf of the Board
Robin Budenberg
Chair
HBOS plc
8 March 2022
HBOS plc
Strategic report
5
Results
The consolidated income statement on page 22 shows a statutory profit before tax for the year ended 31 December 2021 of £2,271 million (year
ended 31 December 2020: £1,214 million).
Dividends
During the year the Company paid an interim dividend of £500 million (2020: £nil). The Directors have not recommended a final dividend for the
year ended 31 December 2021 (2020: £nil).
Post balance sheet events
There were no material post balance sheet events.
Going concern
The going concern of both the Company and the Group is dependent on successfully funding their respective balance sheets and maintaining
adequate levels of capital. In order to satisfy themselves that the Company and the Group have adequate resources to continue to operate for
the foreseeable future, the Directors have reviewed the Company and the Group's operating plan and its funding and capital positions,
including consideration of the short-term implications of the COVID-19 pandemic and climate change. The Directors have taken into account
the impact of further stress scenarios.
Accordingly, the Directors conclude that the Group had adequate resources to continue in operational existence for a period of at least 12
months from the date of the approval of the financial statements and therefore it is appropriate to continue to adopt the going concern basis in
preparing the accounts. 
Corporate Governance Statement
In accordance with the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 (as amended by the
Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting) Regulations 2018) (the ‘Regulations’), for the year ended 31 December 2021, the Company has in its
corporate governance arrangements applied the Wates Corporate Governance Principles for Large Private Companies (the ‘Principles’), which
are available at www.frc.org.uk. The following section explains the Company’s approach to corporate governance, and its application of the
Principles.
Fundamental to the Company’s strategy are high standards of corporate governance. A Corporate Governance Framework is in place for Lloyds
Banking Group, the Company, Lloyds Bank plc and Bank of Scotland plc, with all four companies sharing a common approach to governance.
The framework is designed to meet the specific needs of each company, setting the wider approach and applicable standards in respect of the
Company’s corporate governance practices, including addressing the matters set out in the Principles.
This includes the matters reserved to the Board, and the matters the Board has chosen to delegate to management, including decision making
on operational matters such as those relating to credit, liquidity, and the day-to-day management of risk. Governance arrangements, including
the Corporate Governance Framework, are reviewed periodically to ensure they remain fit for purpose. The Board delegates further
responsibilities to the Group Chief Executive, who is supported by the Group Executive Committee, the composition of which is detailed on
pages 74 to 75 of the Lloyds Banking Group Annual Report and Accounts for 2021. The Corporate Governance Framework of the Company
further addresses the requirements of the Principles as discussed below.
Principle One – Purpose and Leadership
The Board is collectively responsible for the long term success of the Company. It achieves this by agreeing the Company’s strategy, within the
wider strategy of Lloyds Banking Group, and overseeing delivery against it. The Company’s strategy is discussed further in the Strategic Report.
The Board also assumes responsibility for the management of the culture, values and wider standards of the Company, within the equivalent
standards set by Lloyds Banking Group. The Board’s understanding of stakeholders’ interests is central to these responsibilities and informs key
aspects of Board decision making.
Acknowledging the needs of all stakeholders is fundamental to the way the Company operates, as is maintaining the highest standards of
business conduct, which along with ensuring delivery for customers is a vital part of the corporate culture. The Company’s approach is further
influenced by the need to build a culture in which everyone feels included, empowered and inspired to do the right thing for customers. To this
end, the Board plays a lead role in establishing, promoting, and monitoring the Company’s corporate culture and values, with the Corporate
Governance Framework ensuring such matters receive the level of prominence in Board and Executive decision making which they require. The
Company’s corporate culture and values align to those of Lloyds Banking Group, which are discussed in more detail on page 80 of the Lloyds
Banking Group Annual Report and Accounts for 2021.
Principle Two – Board Composition
The Company is led by a Board comprising a Non-Executive Chair, independent Non-Executive Directors and Executive Directors, further
details of the Directors can be found on page 10. The Board considers its composition regularly and is committed to ensuring it has the right
balance of skills and experience. The Board considers its current size and composition is appropriate to the Company’s circumstances. The
Board places great emphasis on ensuring its membership reflects diversity in its broadest sense. New appointments are made on merit, taking
account of the specific skills and experience, independence and knowledge needed to ensure a rounded board and the diversity benefits each
candidate can bring overall. There are a range of initiatives across Lloyds Banking Group to help ensure unbiased career progression
opportunities. Progress on diversity objectives is monitored by the Board and built into its assessment of executive performance.
The Board undertakes a periodic review of its effectiveness, which provides an opportunity to consider ways of identifying greater efficiencies,
ways to maximise strengths and highlights areas of further development. Given the appointment of a new Group Chief Executive in August 2021
and the development of the Company’s ongoing strategy within the wider Lloyds Banking Group, the Board agreed that an evaluation of its
effectiveness would be conducted in 2022 to allow the review to cover the Board’s effectiveness in overseeing these developments.
Principle Three – Director Responsibilities
The Directors assume ultimate responsibility for all matters, and along with senior management are committed to maintaining a robust control
framework as the foundation for the delivery of good governance, including the effective management of delegation through the Corporate
Governance Framework. Policies are also in place in relation to potential conflicts of interest which may arise. All Directors have access to the
services of the Company Secretary, and independent professional advice is available to the Directors at the expense of Lloyds Banking Group,
where they judge it necessary to discharge their duties as directors.
HBOS plc
Directors’ report
6
The Board is supported by its committees which make recommendations on matters delegated to them under the Corporate Governance
Framework. The management of all committees is in keeping with the basis on which meetings of the Board are managed, with open debate,
and adequate time for members to consider proposals which are put forward. The Chair of the Board and each Board committee assumes
responsibility with support from the Company Secretary for the provision to each meeting of accurate and timely information.
Principle Four – Opportunity and Risk
The Board oversees the development and implementation of the Company’s strategy, within the context of the wider strategy of Lloyds Banking
Group, which includes consideration of all strategic opportunities. The Board is also responsible for the long term sustainable success of the
Company, generating value for its shareholders and ensuring a positive contribution to society. The Board agrees the Company’s culture,
purpose, values and strategy, within that of Lloyds Banking Group, and agrees the related standards of the Company, again within the relevant
standards of Lloyds Banking Group. Further specific aims and objectives of the Board are formalised within the Corporate Governance
Framework, which also sets out the matters reserved for the Board.
Strong risk management is central to the strategy of the Company, which along with a robust risk control framework acts as the foundation for
the delivery of effective management of risk. The Board agrees the Company’s risk appetite and ensures the Company manages risk effectively,
delegating related authorities to individuals through the Corporate Governance Framework and the further management hierarchy. Board level
engagement coupled with the direct involvement of senior management in risk issues ensures that escalated issues are promptly addressed,
and remediation plans are initiated where required. The Company’s risk appetite, principles, policies, procedures, controls and reporting are
managed in conjunction with those of Lloyds Banking Group, and as such are regularly reviewed to ensure they remain fully in line with
regulations, law, corporate governance and industry best practice. The Company’s principal risks are discussed further on page 4.
Principle Five – Remuneration
The Board, in conjunction with the Remuneration Committee of Lloyds Banking Group (the ‘Remuneration Committee’), assumes responsibility
for the Company’s approach to remuneration. This includes reviewing and making recommendations on remuneration policy as relevant to
colleagues employed by the Company. The activities of the Remuneration Committee extend to matters of remuneration relevant to
subsidiaries of the Company, where such subsidiary does not have its own remuneration committee. Certain members of the Lloyds Banking
Group Executive, including the Group People and Property Director, are authorised to act upon the decisions made by the Remuneration
Committee, and to undertake such other duties relevant to remuneration as delegated to them.
Principle Six – Stakeholders
The COVID-19 pandemic continued to have an effect on the way we live, including on the Company’s many stakeholders. The Board has
monitored the impact of the pandemic on the Group’s and Company’s business and its stakeholders, seeking to ensure that the challenges
posed by the pandemic were addressed. The Board considered related updates from management as events unfolded, covering matters
including the continued impact on customers, colleagues, suppliers and other stakeholders, approving suitable action as required.
The Company as part of Lloyds Banking Group operates under Lloyds Banking Group’s wider Responsible Business approach, which
acknowledges that the Company has a responsibility to help address the economic, social and environmental challenges which the UK faces,
and as part of this understand the needs of the Company’s external stakeholders, including in the development and implementation of strategy.
Central to this is Lloyds Banking Group’s Helping Britain Prosper plan, in which the Company participates. During the year there was a focus on
the response to COVID, and Helping Britain Recover. This involved bringing together many of the Board’s key stakeholders, to determine how
the Company could best support the recovery from the pandemic, the outcomes of this initiative being set out on pages 26 to 29 of the Lloyds
Banking Group Annual Report and Accounts for 2021.
In 2021 the Responsible Business Committee of Lloyds Banking Group provided further oversight and support of Lloyds Banking Group’s and
the Company’s plans for embedding responsible business in the Company's core purpose. The approach of the Board in respect of its key
stakeholders is described further in a separate statement made in compliance with the Regulations on pages 2 to 3.
Directors
The names of the current Directors are shown on page 10. Changes to the composition of the Board since 1 January 2021 up to the date of this
report are shown in the table below.
Joined the Board
Left the Board
Charlie Nunn
16 August 2021
Harmeen Mehta
1 November 2021
Lord Blackwell
1 January 2021
Sir António Horta-Osório
30 April 2021
Sara Weller
20 May 2021
Nick Prettejohn
30 September 2021
Stuart Sinclair will retire as a director of the Company at the forthcoming Lloyds Banking Group AGM.
Directors’ indemnities
The Directors of the Company, including the former Directors who retired during the year, have entered into individual deeds of indemnity with
Lloyds Banking Group plc which constitute ‘qualifying third party indemnity provisions’ for the purposes of the Companies Act 2006. The deeds
indemnify the Directors to the maximum extent permitted by law and remain in force. The deeds were in force during the whole of the financial
year or from the date of appointment in respect of the Directors appointed in 2021. In addition, Lloyds Banking Group plc had appropriate
Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance cover in place throughout 2021. Deeds for existing Directors are available for inspection at the
Company's registered office.
Lloyds Banking Group plc has also granted deeds of indemnity by deed poll and by way of entering into individual deeds, which constitute
‘qualifying third party indemnity provisions’ to the Directors of the Group’s subsidiary companies, including former Directors who retired during
the year, and to colleagues subject to the provisions of the Senior Managers and Certification Regime. Such deeds were in force during the
financial year ended 31 December 2021 and remain in force as at the date of this report. Qualifying pension scheme indemnities have also been
granted to the Trustees of Lloyds Banking Group’s Pension Schemes, including those schemes relevant to the Company, which were in force for
the whole of the financial year and remain in force as at the date of this report.
HBOS plc
Directors’ report
7
Information required under DTR 7.2
Certain information is incorporated into this report by reference. Information about internal control and risk management systems relating to
the financial reporting process can be found on page 5.
Information about share capital is shown in note 26 on page 68. The Company is a wholly owned subsidiary of Lloyds Bank plc, which holds all of
the Company’s issued ordinary share capital.
The Directors manage the business of the Company under the powers set out in the Companies Act 2006 and the Company’s articles of
association, these powers include those in relation to the issue or buy back of the Company’s shares.
The appointment and retirement of Directors is governed by the Company’s articles of association and the Companies Act 2006. The
Company’s articles of association may only be amended by a special resolution of the shareholders in a general meeting.
Conflicts of interest
The Board has a comprehensive procedure for reviewing, and as permitted by the Companies Act 2006 and the Company’s articles of
association, approving actual and potential conflicts of interest. Directors have a duty to notify the Chair and Company Secretary as soon as they
become aware of actual or potential conflict situations. Changes to commitments of all Directors are reported to the Board and a register of
directors' interests is regularly reviewed and authorised by the Board to ensure the authorisation status remains appropriate.
Lord Lupton is a senior adviser to Greenhill Europe, an investment bank focused on providing financial advice on significant mergers,
acquisitions, restructurings, financings and capital raising to corporations, partnerships, institutions and governments. The Board has recognised
that potential conflicts may arise as a result of these positions. The Board has authorised the potential conflicts and requires Lord Lupton to
recuse himself from discussions, should the need arise.
Future developments and financial risk management objectives and policies
Information regarding future developments and financial risk management objectives and policies of the Group in relation to the use of financial
instruments that would otherwise be required to be disclosed in the Directors’ report, and which is incorporated into this report by reference,
can be found in the Strategic Report.
Share capital
Information about share capital is shown in note 26 on page 68. This information is incorporated into this report by reference. The Company did
not repurchase any of its shares during 2021 (2020: none). There are no restrictions on the transfer of shares in the Company other than as set
out in the articles of association and certain restrictions which may from time to time be imposed by law and regulations.
Change of control
The Company is not party to any significant agreements which take effect, alter or terminate upon a change of control of the Company
following a takeover bid. There are no agreements between the Company and its Directors or employees providing compensation for loss of
office or employment that occurs because of a takeover bid.
Research and development activities
During the ordinary course of business the Company and its subsidiaries develop new products and services.
Supporting disability
As part of Lloyds Banking Group, the Company has the ambition of supporting our colleagues with disabilities and long-term health conditions
to be the best that they can be, and to be valued for who they are. Lloyds Banking Group holds the Business Disability Forum Gold Standard
accreditation and has retained Disability Confident status from the Department for Work and Pensions. Bespoke training, career development
and adjustments for colleagues and applicants with disabilities, including those who became disabled while employed.
Information incorporated by reference
The following additional information forms part of the Directors’ Report, and is incorporated by reference.
Content
Pages
Disclosures required under the Large and Medium-sized
Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008
Statement of employee engagement
2 to 3
Statement of other stakeholder engagement
2 to 3
Significant contracts
Details of related party transactions are set out in note 31 on pages 72 to 74.
Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting
The Company has taken advantage of the exemption from Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR) reporting requirements in its own
Directors' Report as it is covered by the Lloyds Banking Group SECR report given in the Lloyds Banking Group plc 2021 Annual Report and
Accounts, available at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/investors/financial-downloads.html
Statement of directors’ responsibilities
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the financial statements in accordance with applicable law and regulations.
Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial statements for each financial year. Under that law, the Directors are required to prepare
the Company's financial statements in accordance with international accounting standards in conformity with the requirements of the
Companies Act 2006.
Under company law, the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the
state of affairs of the Company and of the profit or loss of the Company for that period. In preparing these financial statements, the Directors
are required to properly select and apply accounting policies; present information, including accounting policies, in a manner that provides
relevant, reliable, comparable and understandable information; provide additional disclosures when compliance with the specific requirements
in international accounting standards in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 are insufficient to enable users to
understand the impact of particular transactions, other events and conditions on the entity’s financial position and financial performance; and
make an assessment of the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern.
The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Company’s transactions and
disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Company and enable them to ensure that the financial statements
comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Company and hence for taking reasonable
steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.
HBOS plc
Directors’ report
8
A copy of the financial statements is placed on the website www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/investors/financial-downloads.html. The Directors are
responsible for the maintenance and integrity of all information relating to the Company on that website. Legislation in the UK governing the
preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.
Each of the current Directors who are in office as at the date of this report, and whose names and functions are listed on page 10 of this annual
report, confirm that, to the best of his or her knowledge:
The Company’s financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with international accounting standards in conformity with
the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the
Company
The management report contained in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ report includes a fair review of the development and
performance of the business and the position of the Company together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties they face
The Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, are fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for
shareholders to assess the Company’s position, performance, business model and strategy. The Directors have also separately reviewed
and approved the strategic report.
Independent auditor and audit information
Each person who is a Director at the date of approval of this report confirms that, so far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit
information of which the Company’s auditor is unaware and each Director has taken all the steps that he or she ought to have taken as a
Director to make himself or herself aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the Company’s auditor is aware of that
information. This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006.
On behalf of the Board
Kate Cheetham
Company Secretary
8 March 2022
HBOS plc
Registered in Scotland
Company Number SC218813
HBOS plc
Directors’ report
9
Executive Directors:
Charlie Nunn Group Chief Executive
William Chalmers Chief Financial Officer
Non-Executive Directors:
Robin Budenberg CBE Chair
Alan Dickinson Deputy Chair
Sarah Legg
Lord Lupton CBE
Amanda Mackenzie OBE
Harmeen Mehta
Stuart Sinclair
Catherine Woods
HBOS plc
Current Directors
10
This document contains certain forward looking statements within the meaning of Section 21E of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as
amended, and section 27A of the US Securities Act of 1933, as amended, with respect to the business, strategy, plans and/or results of HBOS
plc together with its subsidiaries (the Group) (the Group) and its current goals and expectations. Statements that are not historical or current
facts, including statements about the Group's or its directors' and/or management's beliefs and expectations, are forward looking statements.
Words such as, without limitation, ‘believes’, ‘achieves’, ‘anticipates’, ‘estimates’, ‘expects’, ‘targets’, ‘should’, ‘intends’, ‘aims’, ‘projects’, ‘plans’,
‘potential’, ‘will’, ‘would’, ‘could’, ‘considered’, ‘likely’, ‘may’, ‘seek’, ‘estimate’, ‘probability’, ‘goal’, ‘objective’, ‘deliver’, ‘endeavour’, ‘prospects’,
‘optimistic’ and similar expressions or variations on these expressions are intended to identify forward looking statements. These statements
concern or may affect future matters, including but not limited to: projections or expectations of the Group’s future financial position, including
profit attributable to shareholders, provisions, economic profit, dividends, capital structure, portfolios, net interest margin, capital ratios,
liquidity, risk-weighted assets (RWAs), expenditures or any other financial items or ratios; litigation, regulatory and governmental investigations;
the Group’s future financial performance; the level and extent of future impairments and write-downs; the Group’s ESG targets and/or
commitments; statements of plans, objectives or goals of the Group or its management and other statements that are not historical fact;
expectations about the impact of COVID-19; and statements of assumptions underlying such statements. By their nature, forward looking
statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to events and depend upon circumstances that will or may occur in the future.
Factors that could cause actual business, strategy, plans and/or results (including but not limited to the payment of dividends) to differ
materially from forward looking statements include, but are not limited to: general economic and business conditions in the UK and
internationally; market related risks, trends and developments; risks concerning borrower and counterparty credit quality; fluctuations in interest
rates, inflation, exchange rates, stock markets and currencies; volatility in credit markets; volatility in the price of our securities; any impact of the
transition from IBORs to alternative reference rates; the ability to access sufficient sources of capital, liquidity and funding when required;
changes to the Group’s credit ratings; the ability to derive cost savings and other benefits including, but without limitation, as a result of any
acquisitions, disposals and other strategic transactions; inability to capture accurately the expected value from acquisitions; potential changes in
dividend policy; the ability to achieve strategic objectives; insurance risks; management and monitoring of conduct risk; exposure to
counterparty risk; credit rating risk; tightening of monetary policy in jurisdictions in which the Group operates; instability in the global financial
markets, including within the Eurozone, and as a result of ongoing uncertainty following the exit by the UK from the European Union (EU) and
the effects of the EU-UK Trade and Cooperation Agreement; political instability including as a result of any UK general election and any further
possible referendum on Scottish independence; operational risks; conduct risk; technological changes and risks to the security of IT and
operational infrastructure, systems, data and information resulting from increased threat of cyber and other attacks; natural pandemic (including
but not limited to the COVID-19 pandemic) and other disasters; inadequate or failed internal or external processes or systems; acts of hostility
or terrorism and responses to those acts, or other such events; geopolitical unpredictability; risks relating to sustainability and climate change
(and achieving climate change ambitions), including the Group’s ability along with the government and other stakeholders to measure, manage
and mitigate the impacts of climate change effectively; changes in laws, regulations, practices and accounting standards or taxation; changes to
regulatory capital or liquidity requirements and similar contingencies; assessment related to resolution planning requirements; the policies and
actions of governmental or regulatory authorities or courts together with any resulting impact on the future structure of the Group; failure to
comply with anti-money laundering, counter terrorist financing, anti-bribery and sanctions regulations; failure to prevent or detect any illegal or
improper activities; projected employee numbers and key person risk; increased labour costs; assumptions and estimates that form the basis of
our financial statements; the impact of competitive conditions; and exposure to legal, regulatory or competition proceedings, investigations or
complaints. A number of these influences and factors are beyond the Group’s control. Please refer to the latest Annual Report on Form 20-F
filed by Lloyds Bank plc with the US Securities and Exchange Commission (the SEC), which is available on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, for
a discussion of certain factors and risks. Lloyds Banking Group plc may also make or disclose written and/or oral forward-looking statements in
other written materials and in oral statements made by the directors, officers or employees of Lloyds Banking Group plc to third parties,
including financial analysts. Except as required by any applicable law or regulation, the forward-looking statements contained in this document
are made as of today's date, and the Group expressly disclaims any obligation or undertaking to release publicly any updates or revisions to any
forward looking statements contained in this document whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise. The information,
statements and opinions contained in this document do not constitute a public offer under any applicable law or an offer to sell any securities or
financial instruments or any advice or recommendation with respect to such securities or financial instruments.
HBOS plc
Forward looking statements
11
INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT TO THE MEMBERS OF HBOS PLC
Report on the audit of the financial statements
1.Opinion
In our opinion:
the financial statements of HBOS plc (the ‘Parent company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’ or ‘HBOS’) give a true and fair view of the state
of the Group’s and of the Parent company’s affairs as at 31 December 2021 and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended;
the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom adopted international accounting
standards and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB);
the Parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom adopted international
accounting standards and as applied in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006; and
the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.
We have audited the financial statements which comprise the:
Group
Parent company
Consolidated balance sheet as at 31 December 2021;
Consolidated income statement for the year then ended;
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year
then ended;
Consolidated statement of changes in equity for the year then
ended;
Consolidated cash flow statement for the year then ended; and
Notes 1 to 38 to the financial statements, which include the
accounting principles and policies.
Balance sheet as at 31 December 2021;
Statement of comprehensive income for the year then ended;
Statement of changes in equity for the year then ended;
Cash flow statement for the year then ended; and
Notes 1 to 38 to the financial statements, which include the
accounting principles and policies, as applicable to the Parent
company.
The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and United Kingdom adopted international
accounting standards as applied in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006.
2.Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under
those standards are further described in the auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report.
We are independent of the Group and the Parent company in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the
financial statements in the UK, including the Financial Reporting Council’s (the ‘FRC’s’) Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest
entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. The non-audit services provided to the
Group and Parent for the year are disclosed in note 9 to the financial statements. We confirm that we have not provided any non-audit services
prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard to the Group or the Parent company.
We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.
3.Audit scope, approach, and execution
Key audit matters
The key audit matters that we identified in the current year were:
Expected credit losses (Group)
Regulatory and litigation matters (Group)
Defined benefit obligations (Group and Parent company)
IT systems that impact financial reporting (Group and Parent company)
Materiality
Overall materiality used for the Group consolidated financial statements was £155 million, which was determined on the
basis of profit before tax and net assets.
Overall materiality used for the Parent company financial statements was £155 million, which was determined on the
basis of net assets and capped at Group materiality.
Scoping
Our audit scope covers 92% of the Group’s revenue, 98% of the Group’s profit before tax and 98% of the Group’s total
assets.
First year audit transition
This is the first year we have been appointed as auditors to the Group. We undertook a number of transitional procedures to prepare for the
audit including establishing our independence from the Group which involved ceasing a number of commercial relationships and banking
arrangements and changing the financial arrangements for our partners and over 3,000 staff who are in the audit division at Deloitte, or who
work on the Lloyds Banking Group audit including the HBOS Group and Parent company audit. We used the time prior to commencing our
audit to meet with Group leadership and non-executive directors to gain an understanding of the business, its issues and the environment in
which it operates.
We became independent of the Group and commenced our audit planning on 1 January 2020. From that date we attended all Audit
Committee meetings, initially in an observer capacity, and continued to meet regularly with Group leadership, non-executive directors and the
Group’s main regulators. We worked alongside the former auditor, reviewed their working papers and shadowed some of their meetings to
gain an understanding of the Group’s processes, their audit risk assessment, and the controls on which they relied for the purposes of issuing
their audit opinion.
Throughout 2020 we held regular meetings of audit partners and senior staff who would be responsible for undertaking the most significant
areas of the Group audit. The main purpose of these meetings were to outline our audit approach, including discussing possible significant
audit risks, the use of analytics in assessing significant and non-significant risks, to discuss testing approaches, and to brief our teams on the
HBOS plc
Independent auditors’ report
12
Group’s key processes, systems and structure. During these meetings, we also heard directly from the Group on the changes impacting the
business to inform our audit planning and risk assessment.
Our audit approach
We structured our approach to the audit to reflect how the Group is organised as well as ensuring our audit was both effective and risk focused.
Our audit approach can be summarised into the following areas that enabled us to obtain the evidence required to form an opinion on the
Group and Parent company financial statements:
Risk assessment and audit planning. We identified and instructed partners for the Group and Parent company audit, as well as identified
partners to lead areas requiring significant audit judgement including expected credit losses and provisions for regulatory and litigation
matters. These partners met regularly with management to understand business strategy, accounting judgements and estimations and
other matters which arose during the year that could have impacted the Group’s financial reporting. Our risk assessment was further
informed by detailed analytics as well as other quantitative and qualitative audit procedures, including consideration of matters such as the
impact of the global pandemic and climate change on the account balances, disclosures and company practices;
Audit procedures undertaken at a Group level and on the Parent company. In addition to the above, the Group and the Parent
company were subject to audit procedures. Government work-from-home orders and travel restrictions in force during the year required our
team to work and communicate remotely. We were able to complete our audit work through increased videoconferencing and direct
reviews of work completed, and continued to attend virtually the planning and clearance meetings with management. We also performed
audit work on the Group and the Parent company financial statements, including the consolidation of the Group’s results, the preparation of
the financial statements, litigation provisions and exposures in addition to the Group’s entity level and oversight controls relevant to
financial reporting;
Internal controls testing approach. We tested internal controls over financial reporting where our scoping and risk assessment determined
those controls to be relevant to the audit. This included testing of general IT controls, process level controls and entity level controls at the
Group level; and
The impact of climate change on our audit. In planning our audit, we have considered the impact of climate change on the Group’s
operations and subsequent impact on its financial statements. The Group sets out its assessment of the potential impact in the Strategic
Report on page 4 of the Annual Report.
In conjunction with our climate risk specialists, we have held discussions with the Group to understand their:
process for identifying affected operations, including the governance and controls over this process, and the subsequent effect on the
financial reporting for the Group; and
long-term strategy to respond to climate change risks as they evolve including the effect on the Group’s forecasts.
Our audit work has involved:
challenging the completeness of the physical and transition risks identified and considered in the Group’s climate risk assessment and
the conclusion that there is no material impact of climate change risk on the current year financial reporting;
assessing the Group’s qualitative loan sector analysis, which supports the Group’s conclusion that there is no material financial
statement impact of climate risk on expected credit losses; and
assessing disclosures in the annual report, and challenging the consistency between the financial statements and the remainder of the
annual report.
As part of our audit procedures we read the Group’s disclosures on page 4 and considered whether they are materially inconsistent with the
financial statements or knowledge obtained in the audit and we did not identify any material inconsistencies as a result of these procedures.
4.Conclusions relating to going concern
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of
the financial statements is appropriate.
Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the Group’s and the Parent company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of
accounting included:
using our knowledge of the Group and the Parent company, the financial services industry, the financial services regulatory environment and
the general economic environment to identify inherent risks in the business model and how such risks might affect the financial resources or
ability to continue operations over the going concern period;
making enquiries of Group management about the assumptions, including climate risk considerations, used in their going concern models,
and assessing the reasonableness of those assumptions and historical forecasting accuracy;
evaluating the Group’s strategic plans, short and longer term financial budgets, funding, liquidity and capital adequacy plans including
internal stress tests;
considering the Group’s operational resilience;
reading analyst reports, industry data, Bank of England reports and other external information to determine if it provided corroborative or
contradictory evidence in relation to the Group’s assumptions;
reviewing correspondence and meeting with prudential and conduct regulators to assess whether there are any matters that may impact the
going concern assessment;
testing the underlying data generated to prepare the forecast scenarios and determined whether there was adequate support for the
assumptions underlying the forecasts; and
evaluating the Group’s disclosures on going concern against the requirements of IAS 1.
Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually or
collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group's and the Parent company’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least
twelve months from when the financial statements are authorised for issue.
Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections of this report.
HBOS plc
Independent auditors’ report
13
5.Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the financial statements of the
current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that we identified. These
matters included those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit, and directing the
efforts of the engagement team.
These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do
not provide a separate opinion on these matters.
Expected credit losses (Group)
Key audit matter description
How the scope of our audit responded to the key audit matter
Refer to notes 2, 3, 10, 13 and 36 in the financial statements
The Group has recognised £2.6 billion of expected credit losses
(“ECL”) at 31 December 2021. The determination of ECL
consists of a number of assumptions that require a high degree
of judgement and involve complex impairment modelling. The
key areas we identified as having the most significant level of
management judgement were in respect of:
Multiple Economic Scenarios (MES);
Retail ECL; and
Commercial ECL.
Multiple economic scenarios
The measurement of expected credit losses is required to
reflect an unbiased probability-weighted range of possible
future outcomes.
The Group’s economics team develops the future economic
scenarios. Firstly, a base case forecast is produced based on a
set of conditioning assumptions, which are designed to reflect
the Group’s best view of future events. A full distribution of
economic scenarios around this base case is produced using a
Monte Carlo simulation and scenarios within that distribution
are ranked using estimated relationships with industrywide
historical loss data.
Four scenarios are derived from the distribution as averages of
constituent modelled scenarios around the 15th, 75th and 95th
percentiles of the distribution corresponding to an upside, a
downside and a severe downside, respectively. The upside, the
base case and the downside scenarios are weighted at 30% and
the severe downside at 10%.
These four scenarios are then used as key assumptions in the
determination of the ECL allowance.
The development of these multiple economic scenarios is
inherently uncertain, highly complex, and requires significant
judgement. The global pandemic has increased the uncertainty
of the conditioning assumptions used to develop the base case
and, to account for this, the Group have recognised an
adjustment to their multiple economic scenarios model to
account for the significant downside uncertainties.
Working with our internal economic team and modelling specialists, we
performed the following procedures:
Tested the controls over the generation of the multiple economic
scenarios including those over the Group’s governance processes to
determine the base case, different scenarios and the weightings applied
to each scenario;
Challenged and evaluated economic forecasts in the base scenario such
as the unemployment rate, House Price Index and Gross Domestic
Product through comparison to an independent economic outlook,
external analysts and market data;
Challenged and evaluated the appropriateness of the methodology
applied to generate alternative macroeconomic scenarios, including
associated weightings, and assumptions within;
Tested whether the methodology has been appropriately reflected in
the model code by producing an independent version of the model
generating alternative macroeconomic scenarios and reconciling its
outputs to the Group’s model;
Tested the completeness and accuracy of the data used by the model;
Performed a stand back assessment of the appropriateness of the
weightings applied to each of the scenarios based on publicly available
data; and
Evaluated the adequacy of disclosures in respect of significant
judgements and sources of estimation uncertainty including
macroeconomic scenarios.
In respect of the adjustment to the multiple economic scenarios model, we
performed the following procedures:
Tested the controls over review, challenge, and approval of this central
adjustment;
Tested the completeness and accuracy of the data used in the
quantification of the model adjustment; and
Evaluated the adequacy of the disclosures of the adjustment, including
the sensitivity analysis.
HBOS plc
Independent auditors’ report
14
Key audit matter description
How the scope of our audit responded to the key audit matter
Retail ECL
The ECL for the Retail division is determined on a collective
basis using impairment models to calculate a probability
weighted estimate by applying an appropriate probability of
default, estimated exposure at default and taking account of
collateral held or other loss mitigants, discounted using the
effective interest rate.
The key judgements and estimates in determining the ECL for
the Retail division include:
model estimations, including model assumptions and data
used such as statistical modelling triangulations, behavioral
lives, and portfolio data;
the appropriate allocation of assets into the correct stage of 1,
2 or 3 under IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’ taking into account
any significant deterioration in credit risk since inception; and
in-model and post-model adjustments (IMAs and PMAs) which
are recognised to address identified model and data
limitations.
We tested controls across the process to determine the ECL provisions
including the following:
Model governance including model validation and monitoring;
In-model adjustments (IMA) and post-model adjustments (PMA);
Model assumptions;
The allocation of assets into stages; and
Data accuracy and completeness.
Working with our internal modelling specialists, our audit procedures over
the key areas of estimation included:
Model estimations, where we:
assessed and challenged the appropriateness of modelling approach
and assumptions used;
independently replicated the models for the most material portfolios
and compared outputs of our instances of the models to the Group’s;
evaluated whether other models operate in line with their specification
through inspecting and re-running the model code designed by the
Group;
assessed model performance by evaluating variations between
observed data and model predictions;
developed an understanding of and assessed model limitations and
remedial actions; and
tested the completeness and accuracy of the data used in model
execution and calibration.
Allocation of assets into stages, where we:
evaluated the appropriateness of quantitative and qualitative criteria
used for allocation into IFRS 9 stages;
tested the appropriateness of the stage allocation for a sample of
exposures; and
tested the data used by models in assigning IFRS 9 stages and
evaluated the appropriateness of the model logic used.
In-model and post-model adjustments, where we:
challenged the methodology, approach and assumptions in
developing IMAs and PMAs, and evaluated the Group’s selection of
approach for indications of bias;
tested the completeness and accuracy of the data used;
performed a recalculation of the IMAs and PMAs; and
evaluated the completeness of IMAs and PMAs based on our
understanding of model and data limitations, including those
highlighted by the COVID-19 pandemic.
Adequacy of disclosures, where we:
assessed whether the disclosures appropriately address the
uncertainty which exists in determining the ECL.
HBOS plc
Independent auditors’ report
15
Key audit matter description
How the scope of our audit responded to the key audit matter
Commercial ECL
The ECL in the Commercial Banking division is calculated on a
collective basis for performing loans, being those in stage 1 and
2, and on an individual basis for larger impaired loans in stage 3.
The collective provision is determined using impairment
models. The models use a number of significant judgments to
calculate a probability weighted ECL estimate applying an
appropriate probability of default, estimated exposure at
default and taking account of collateral held or other loss
mitigants, discounted using the effective interest rate. The key
driver of the probability of default and, therefore, the staging of
Commercial Banking exposures is the credit risk rating. The
determination of these credit risk ratings is performed on a
counterparty basis for larger exposures by a credit officer and
involves a high degree of judgement and consideration of
multiple sources of information.
Therefore, we focused our work on testing the credit risk ratings
feeding the collective models and the appropriateness of the
methodology.
For individual assessments of larger exposures in Stage 3, the
significant judgements in determining provisions and where we
focused our work are the:
completeness and appropriateness of the potential workout
and restructuring scenarios identified;
probability assigned to each identified potential workout and
restructuring scenario through the use of best, likely or worst
case flags; and
valuation assumptions used in determining the workout and
restructuring scenarios.
We tested the controls across the process to determine the ECL provisions
including:
the determination of credit risk ratings;
the allocation into stages, particularly the assessment of a significant
change in credit risk;
model governance and arithmetical accuracy of provision calculations;
data accuracy and completeness; and
recognition and calculation of post-model adjustments.
We performed the following audit procedures over:
Expected credit losses determined through impairment models:
Independently assessed the credit rating and tested whether a
significant increase in credit risk had occurred to result in a stage 2
classification against IFRS 9 criteria;
Assessed and challenged the model methodologies, approach and
assumptions, including those used in developing the IMAs and PMAs;
Tested the completeness and accuracy of data used; and
Performed a recalculation of the IFRS 9 collective provision.
Expected credit losses assessed individually:
Assessed the exposures to determine if they met the definition of
credit impaired;
Performed independent assessments to determine the
appropriateness of recovery scenarios and associated cash flows,
including considerations of climate risks on recoveries;
Evaluated valuations, including the use of internal specialists for
business valuations; and
Independently assessed and challenged the completeness of workout
and restructuring scenarios identified and weightings applied.
Adequacy of disclosures, where we:
assessed whether the disclosures appropriately address the
uncertainty which exists in determining the ECL.
Key observations communicated to the Audit Committee
We are satisfied that the ECL are reasonable and recognised in accordance with the requirements of IFRS 9. The calculations are based on
appropriate methodologies using reasonable modelled assumptions, including IMAs and PMAs addressing model shortcomings. Where
control deficiencies were identified, particularly in data linkage to models, compensating controls were identified and operated effectively.
Overall ECL levels are reasonable compared to peer benchmarking information, although we did identify some prudence in our assessment of
some of the model adjustments.
HBOS plc
Independent auditors’ report
16
Regulatory and litigation matters (Group)
Key audit matter description
How the scope of our audit responded to the key audit matter
Refer to notes 2, 3 and 24 in the financial statements.
The Group operates in an environment where it is subject to
regulatory investigations, litigation and customer remediation.
The Group is currently exposed to a number of regulatory and
litigation matters. The Group’s provision for these matters is
£0.8bn at 31 December 2021, the most significant of which is the
HBOS Reading matter.
Significant judgement is required by the Group in determining
whether, under IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and
Contingent Assets:
a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the
obligation, particularly where the information available is
limited as is the case with HBOS Reading; and
any contingent liabilities and underlying significant estimation
uncertainties are adequately disclosed.
We performed the following audit procedures:
Tested the Group’s controls over the completeness of provisions, the
robustness of the assessment of the provision against the requirements
of IAS 37, the appropriateness of judgements used to determined a
‘best estimate’ and the completeness and accuracy of data used in the
process;
evaluated the assessment of the provisions, associated probabilities, and
potential outcomes in accordance with IAS 37;
verified and challenged whether the methodology, data and significant
judgements and assumptions used in the valuation of the provisions are
appropriate in the context of the applicable financial reporting
framework;
In respect of HBOS Reading, we inspected information available for the
limited number of awards made by the Foskett panel and tested the
methodology applied to determine the provision;
inspected correspondence and, where appropriate, made direct enquiry
with the Group’s regulators and internal and external legal counsel;
where no provision was made, we critically assessed and challenged the
conclusion in the context of the requirements of IAS 37 Provisions,
Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets; and
evaluated whether the disclosures made in the financial statements
appropriately reflect the facts and key sources of estimation uncertainty.
Key observations communicated to the Audit Committee
While there is significant judgement required in estimating the timing and value of future settlements, particularly in relation to the HBOS
Reading matter, we are satisfied that the approach to the estimation of these provisions is consistent with the requirements of IAS 37.
Defined benefit obligations (Group and Parent company)
Key audit matter description
How the scope of our audit responded to the key audit matter
Refer to notes 2, 3 and 22 in the financial statements
The Group and Parent company operate a number of defined
benefit retirement schemes, the obligations for which totalled
£16.6bn and £16.3bn respectively at 31 December 2021. Their
valuation is determined with reference to key actuarial
assumptions including mortality assumptions, discount rates
and inflation rates. Due to the size of these schemes, small
changes in these assumptions can have a material impact on the
value of the defined benefit obligation and therefore, the
assessment of these assumptions are a key judgement.
We performed the following audit procedures:
Tested the Group’s controls over the valuation of the defined benefit
obligations, including controls over the assumptions setting process; and
Challenged the key actuarial assumptions used by comparing against
ranges and expectations determined by our internal actuarial experts,
which are calculated with reference to the central assumptions adopted
by the actuarial firms for whom we have reviewed and accepted their
methodologies.
Key observations communicated to the Audit Committee
We are satisfied that the Group's judgements in relation to the actuarial assumptions were reasonable.
HBOS plc
Independent auditors’ report
17
IT systems that impact financial reporting (Group and Parent company)
Key audit matter description
How the scope of our audit responded to the key audit matter
The Group’s IT environment is inherently complex as it supports
a broad range of banking products and facilitates the
processing of a significant volume of transactions.
The IT systems within the Group form a critical component of
the Group’s financial reporting activities and impact all account
balances with a reliance on automated and IT dependent
manual controls. Due to the significant reliance on IT systems,
effective General IT Controls (GITCs) are critical to allow reliance
to be placed on the completeness and accuracy of financial data
and the integrity of automated system functionality (e.g. system
calculations).
We identified the IT systems that impact financial reporting as a
key audit matter because of the:
pervasive reliance on complex technology that is integral to
the operation of key business processes and financial
reporting;
reliance on technology which continues to develop in line with
the business strategy, such as the increase in the use of
automation across the Group and increasing reliance on third
parties; and
importance of the IT controls in maintaining an effective
control environment. A key interdependency exists between
the ability to rely on IT controls and the ability to rely on
financial data, system configured automated controls and
system reports.
IT controls, in the context of our audit scope, primarily relate to
privileged access at the infrastructure level, user access security
at the application level and change control.
Our IT audit scope tested the Group’s IT controls over information systems
deemed relevant to the audit based on the financial data, system
configured automated controls and/or key financial reports that reside
within it.
We used IT specialists to support our evaluation of the risks associated
with IT in the following areas:
General IT Controls, including user access and change management
controls;
Key financial reports and system configured automated controls; and
Cyber security risk assessment.
Where deficiencies in the IT control environment were identified, our risk
assessment procedures included an assessment of those deficiencies to
determine the impact on our audit plan. Where relevant, the audit plan
was adjusted to mitigate the unaddressed IT risk.
Where we were able to identify and test appropriate mitigating controls
over affected financial statement line items, our testing approach
remained unchanged.
In a limited number of areas, we adopted a non-controls reliance approach
and we therefore performed additional substantive procedures.
Key observations communicated to the Audit Committee
IT control deficiencies were identified in respect of privileged user access to IT infrastructure and in application user access management. The
existence of these deficiencies in the year resulted in an increased risk in relation to data, reports and automated system functionality from the
affected systems.
However, overall, in combination with business mitigating controls, we are satisfied that the Group’s overall IT control environment
appropriately supports the financial reporting process.
6.Our application of materiality
6.1Materiality
We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial statements that makes it probable that the economic decisions of a
reasonably knowledgeable person would be changed or influenced. We use materiality both in planning the scope of our audit work and in
evaluating the results of our work.
Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:
Group financial statements
Parent company financial statements
Materiality
£155 million (2020: £120 million)
£155 million (2020: £120 million)
Basis for determining
materiality
In determining our benchmark for materiality, we have
considered the metrics used by investors and other
users of the financial statements. We have determined
the following benchmarks to be the most relevant to
users of the financial statements:
Pre-tax profit; and
Net assets.
The determined materiality represents 6.8% of pre-tax
profit and 1.0% of net assets.
The increase in materiality from the predecessor
auditor’s determination of £120 million in 2020 is
primarily due to the increase in profit at 31 December
2021.
Parent company materiality represents 0.6% of net
assets, and is capped at Group materiality.
Rationale for the
benchmark applied
Given the importance of these measures to investors
and users of the financial statements, we have used pre-
tax profit as the primary benchmark for our
determination of materiality, and net assets as a
supporting benchmark.
The Parent company holds the Group's investments and
is not profit driven. The balance sheet is the key
measure of financial health that is important to
shareholders since the primary concern for the Parent
company is the receipt and payment of dividends.
However, given the size of the entity’s balance sheet,
we have capped materiality at the Group’s materiality.
HBOS plc
Independent auditors’ report
18
6.2Performance materiality
We set performance materiality at a level lower than materiality to reduce the probability that, in aggregate, uncorrected and undetected
misstatements exceed the materiality for the financial statements as a whole.
Group financial statements
Parent company financial statements
Performance
materiality
60% of Group materiality – £92 million
60% of Parent company materiality – £92 million
Basis and rationale for
determining
performance
materiality
In determining performance materiality, we considered the following factors:
a.The current financial year being Deloitte LLP’s first year auditing the Group and Parent financial statements;
b.The quality of the control environment and whether we were able to rely on controls;
c.Degree of centralisation and commonality of controls and processes;
d.The uncertain economic environment arising from the COVID-19 pandemic;
e.The nature, volume and size of uncorrected misstatements arising in the previous audit; and
f.The nature, volume and size of uncorrected misstatements that remain uncorrected in the current period.
6.3Error reporting threshold
We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report all audit differences in excess of £8 million (2020: £12 million), as well as any
differences below this threshold, which in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. We also report to the Audit Committee on
disclosure matters that we identified when assessing the overall presentation of the financial statements.
7.Other Information
The other information comprises the information included in the Annual Report, other than the financial
statements and our auditor’s report thereon. The Directors are responsible for the other information contained
within the Annual Report. Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and,
except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our report, we do not express any form of assurance
conclusion thereon.
Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is
materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in course of the audit or
otherwise appears to be materially misstated.
If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine
whether this gives rise to a material misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If, based on the work
we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required
to report that fact.
We summarise below our work in relation to areas of the other information including those areas upon which we
are specifically required to report:
We have nothing to
report in this regard.
Our responsibility
Our reporting
Matters we are specifically required to report
Strategic report and
directors’ report
Report whether they are consistent with the audited
financial statements and are prepared in accordance
with applicable legal requirements.
Report if we have identified any material misstatements
in either report in the light of the knowledge and
understanding of the Group and of the Parent company
and their environment obtained in the course of the
audit.
As set out in the section “Opinions on other matters
prescribed by the Companies Act 2006”, in our opinion,
based on the work undertaken in the course of the
audit, the information in these reports is consistent with
the audited financial statements and has been prepared
in accordance with applicable legal requirements.
Principal risks (within
the Strategic Report)
Review the confirmation and description in the light of
the knowledge gathered during the audit, such as
through considering the directors’ processes to support
the statements made, challenging the Group’s key
judgements and estimates, consideration of historical
forecasting accuracy and evaluating macro-economic
assumptions.
We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.
8.Responsibilities of Directors
As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements
and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the
preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.
In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s and the Parent company’s ability to continue as a
going concern, disclosing as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors
either intend to liquidate the Group or the Parent company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.
HBOS plc
Independent auditors’ report
19
9.Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement,
whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but
is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements
can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the
economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.
A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/
auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report.
10.Extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our responsibilities,
outlined above, to detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which our procedures are capable of
detecting irregularities, including fraud is detailed below.
Identifying and assessing potential risks related to irregularities
In identifying and assessing the risks of material misstatement in respect of irregularities, including fraud and non-compliance with laws and
regulations, we considered the following:
The nature of the industry and sector, control environment and business performance including the design of the Group’s remuneration
policies, key drivers for directors’ remuneration, bonus levels and performance targets;
The Group’s own assessment of the risks that irregularities may occur either as a result of fraud or error that was approved by the board on
23 February 2022;
Enquiring of management, in-house legal counsel, internal audit and the Audit Committee, including obtaining and reviewing supporting
documentation, concerning the Group’s policies and procedures relating to:
identifying, evaluating and complying with laws and regulations and whether they were aware of any instances of non-compliance;
detecting and responding to the risks of fraud and whether they have knowledge of any actual, suspected or alleged fraud; and
the internal controls established to mitigate risks related to fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations;
Discussing among the engagement team including relevant internal specialists, including tax, valuations, pensions, IT and industry
specialists regarding how and where fraud might occur in the financial statements and any potential indicators of fraud; and
Obtaining an understanding of the legal and regulatory frameworks that the Group operates in, focusing on those laws and regulations that
had a direct effect on the financial statements, such as provisions of the UK Companies Act, pensions legislation and tax legislation or that
had a fundamental effect on the operations of the Group, including regulation and supervisory requirements of the Prudential Regulation
Authority, Financial Reporting Council and Financial Conduct Authority.
Audit response to risks identified
As a result of performing the above, we identified the Group’s determination of “expected credit losses” as a key audit matter related to the
potential risk of fraud. The key audit matters section of our report explains the matter in more detail and also describes the specific procedures
in response to those key audit matters. In common with all audits under ISAs (UK), we are also required to perform specific procedures to
respond to the risk of management override.
In addition to the above, our procedures to respond to risks identified included the following:
Reviewing the financial statement disclosures and testing to supporting documentation to assess compliance with provisions of relevant
laws and regulations described as having a direct effect on the financial statements;
Enquiring of management, the Audit Committee and in-house and external legal counsel concerning actual and potential litigation and
claims;
Performing analytical procedures to identify any unusual or unexpected relationships that may indicate risks of material misstatement due to
fraud;
Reading minutes of meetings of those charged with governance, reviewing internal audit reports and correspondence with regulators; and
In addressing the risk of fraud through management override of controls, testing the appropriateness of journal entries and other
adjustments; assessing whether the judgements made in making accounting estimates are indicative of a potential bias; and evaluating the
business rationale of any significant transactions that are unusual or outside the normal course of business.
We also communicated relevant identified laws and regulations and potential fraud risks to all engagement team members including specialists
and remained alert to any indications of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations throughout the audit.
HBOS plc
Independent auditors’ report
20
Report on other legal and regulatory requirements
11.Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:
The information given in the strategic report and the directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is
consistent with the financial statements; and
The strategic report and the directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and of the Parent company and their environment obtained in the course of the
audit, we have not identified any material misstatements in the strategic report or the directors’ report.
12.Matters on which we are required to report by exception
Adequacy of explanations received and accounting records
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:
We have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
Adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent company, or returns adequate for our audit
have not been received from branches not visited by us; or
The Parent company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.
We have nothing to
report in respect of
these matters.
Directors’ remuneration
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to report if in our opinion certain disclosures of directors’
remuneration have not been made or is not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.
We have nothing to
report in respect of
these matters.
13. Other matters which we are required to address
Auditor tenure
Following the recommendation of the Audit Committee, we were appointed by shareholders at its annual general meeting on 20 May 2021 to
audit the financial statements of Lloyds Banking Group, including HBOS plc for the year ended 31 December 2021 and subsequent financial
periods. The period of total uninterrupted engagement of the firm is accordingly one year.
Consistency of the audit report with the additional report to the Audit Committee
Our audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the Audit Committee we are required to provide in accordance with ISAs (UK).
14.Use of our report
This report is made solely to the Parent company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006.
Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Parent company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in
an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other
than the Parent company and the Parent company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.
As required by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rule (DTR) 4.1.14R, these financial statements form
part of the European Single Electronic Format (ESEF) prepared Annual Financial Report filed on the National Storage Mechanism of the UK FCA
in accordance with the ESEF Regulatory Technical Standard (‘ESEF RTS’). This auditor’s report provides no assurance over whether the annual
financial report has been prepared using the single electronic format specified in the ESEF RTS.
Michael Lloyd (Senior Statutory Auditor)
For and on behalf of Deloitte LLP
Statutory Auditor
London, United Kingdom
8 March 2022
HBOS plc
Independent auditors’ report
21
2021
2020
Note
£ million
£ million
Interest income
7,167
7,505
Interest expense
(1,781)
(2,234)
Net interest income
4
5,386
5,271
Fee and commission income
563
499
Fee and commission expense
(282)
(274)
Net fee and commission income
5
281
225
Net trading income (losses)
6
56
(321)
Other operating income
7
24
333
Other income
361
237
Total income
5,747
5,508
Operating expenses
8
(3,850)
(2,673)
Impairment credit (charge)
10
374
(1,621)
Profit before tax
2,271
1,214
Tax expense
11
(427)
(29)
Profit for the year
1,844
1,185
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders
1,734
1,021
Profit attributable to non-controlling interests
110
164
Profit for the year
1,844
1,185
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
HBOS plc
Consolidated income statement
for the year ended 31 December 2021
22
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£ million
£ million
£ million
£ million
Profit for the year
1,844
1,185
1,224
142
Other comprehensive income
Items that will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements:
Remeasurements before tax
686
196
698
174
Tax
(226)
(39)
(226)
(33)
460
157
472
141
Items that may subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value
through other comprehensive income:
Change in fair value
(2)
32
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals
(7)
Tax
12
(4)
10
21
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve:
Effective portion of changes in fair value taken to other comprehensive income
(48)
(3)
Net income statement transfers
19
(4)
Tax
11
3
(18)
(4)
Movements in foreign currency translation reserve:
Currency translation differences (tax: £nil)
1
(7)
Total other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax
453
167
472
141
Total comprehensive income for the year
2,297
1,352
1,696
283
Total comprehensive income attributable to ordinary shareholders
2,187
1,188
1,696
283
Total comprehensive income attributable to non-controlling interests
110
164
Total comprehensive income for the year
2,297
1,352
1,696
283
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
HBOS plc
Statements of comprehensive income
for the year ended 31 December 2021
23
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
Note
£ million
£ million
£ million
£ million
Assets
Cash and balances at central banks
3,201
2,841
Items in the course of collection from banks
47
42
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
362
477
384
2,194
Derivative financial instruments
12
4,184
7,310
163
218
Loans and advances to banks
102
225
Loans and advances to customers
279,409
263,766
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
15,181
19,852
2,655
7,245
Financial assets at amortised cost
13
294,692
283,843
2,655
7,245
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
2,179
2,525
Goodwill
15
325
325
Current tax recoverable
317
401
84
52
Deferred tax assets
23
1,502
1,582
Investment in subsidiary undertakings
16
22,588
22,552
Retirement benefit assets
22
1,749
674
1,691
605
Other assets1
17
1,561
1,844
1
2
Total assets
310,119
301,864
27,566
32,868
Liabilities
Deposits from banks1
597
1,015
Customer deposits
170,777
163,001
Repurchase agreements1
30,028
13,680
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
74,789
86,954
1,879
8,414
Items in course of transmission to banks
98
98
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
33
45
Derivative financial instruments
12
4,157
8,452
80
109
Notes in circulation
1,321
1,305
Debt securities in issue
19
7,353
8,297
Other liabilities
21
1,629
1,638
3
7
Retirement benefit obligations
22
129
139
129
139
Deferred tax liabilities
23
390
50
Other provisions
24
1,057
521
Subordinated liabilities
25
2,562
2,853
1,208
1,504
Total liabilities
294,530
287,998
3,689
10,223
Equity
Share capital
26
3,763
3,763
3,763
3,763
Other reserves
27
10,165
10,172
9,678
9,678
Retained profits2
28
(562)
(2,292)
10,436
9,204
Ordinary shareholders’ equity
13,366
11,643
23,877
22,645
Non-controlling interests
2,223
2,223
Total equity
15,589
13,866
23,877
22,645
Total equity and liabilities
310,119
301,864
27,566
32,868
1See note 1 regarding changes to presentation.
2The Company recorded a profit after tax for the year of £1,224 million (2020: £142 million).
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
The Directors approved the financial statements on 8 March 2022.
Robin Budenberg
Charlie Nunn
William Chalmers
Chair
Chief Executive
Chief Financial Officer
HBOS plc
Balance sheets
at 31 December 2021
24
The Group
Attributable to ordinary shareholders
Non-
controlling
interests
Total
Share
capital
Other
reserves
Retained
profits
Total
£ million
£ million
£ million
£ million
£ million
£ million
At 1 January 2020
3,763
10,162
(3,503)
10,422
2,723
13,145
Comprehensive income
Profit for the year
1,021
1,021
164
1,185
Other comprehensive income
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements,
net of tax
157
157
157
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of debt
securities held at fair value through other comprehensive
income, net of tax
21
21
21
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax
(4)
(4)
(4)
Movements in foreign currency translation reserve, net of
tax
(7)
(7)
(7)
Total other comprehensive income
10
157
167
167
Total comprehensive income1
10
1,178
1,188
164
1,352
Transactions with owners
Distributions to non-controlling interests
(164)
(164)
Change in non-controlling interests
(500)
(500)
Capital contributions received
33
33
33
Total transactions with owners
33
33
(664)
(631)
At 31 December 2020
3,763
10,172
(2,292)
11,643
2,223
13,866
Comprehensive income
Profit for the year
1,734
1,734
110
1,844
Other comprehensive income
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements,
net of tax
460
460
460
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of debt
securities held at fair value through other comprehensive
income, net of tax
10
10
10
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax
(18)
(18)
(18)
Movements in foreign currency translation reserve, net of
tax
1
1
1
Total other comprehensive income
(7)
460
453
453
Total comprehensive income1
(7)
2,194
2,187
110
2,297
Transactions with owners
Dividends (note 29)
(500)
(500)
(1)
(501)
Distributions to non-controlling interests
(109)
(109)
Capital contributions received
36
36
36
Total transactions with owners
(464)
(464)
(110)
(574)
At 31 December 2021
3,763
10,165
(562)
13,366
2,223
15,589
1Total comprehensive income attributable to owners of the parent was £2,187 million (2020: £1,188 million).
Further details of movements in the Group’s share capital and reserves are provided in notes 26, 27 and 28.
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
HBOS plc
Statements of changes in equity
for the year ended 31 December 2021
25
The Company
Attributable to ordinary shareholders
Share
capital
Other
reserves
Retained
profits
Total
£ million
£ million
£ million
£ million
At 1 January 2020
3,763
9,678
8,888
22,329
Comprehensive income
Profit for the year
142
142
Other comprehensive income
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax
141
141
Total comprehensive income1
283
283
Transactions with owners
Capital contributions received
33
33
At 31 December 2020
3,763
9,678
9,204
22,645
Comprehensive income
Profit for the year
1,224
1,224
Other comprehensive income
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax
472
472
Total comprehensive income1
1,696
1,696
Transactions with owners
Dividends (note 29)
(500)
(500)
Capital contributions received
36
36
Total transactions with owners
(464)
(464)
At 31 December 2021
3,763
9,678
10,436
23,877
1Total comprehensive income attributable to owners of the parent was £1,696 million (2020: £283 million).
Further details of movements in the Company’s share capital and reserves are provided in notes 26, 27 and 28.
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
HBOS plc
Statements of changes in equity
for the year ended 31 December 2021
26
Note
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£ million
£ million
£ million
£ million
Profit before tax
2,271
1,214
1,255
159
Adjustments for:
Change in operating assets
37(A)
(7,216)
67,610
5,315
(435)
Change in operating liabilities
37(B)
6,288
(67,338)
(6,568)
872
Non-cash and other items
37(C)
(128)
644
(1,509)
(143)
Tax paid (net)
(475)
(296)
51
19
Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities
740
1,834
(1,456)
472
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of financial assets
(109)
(746)
Proceeds from sale and maturity of financial assets
399
624
Dividends received from subsidiaries
1,200
Purchase of fixed assets
(171)
(179)
Proceeds from sale of fixed assets
41
20
Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities
160
(281)
1,200
Cash flows from financing activities
Dividends paid to ordinary shareholders
29
(500)
(500)
Dividends paid to non-controlling interests
(1)
Distributions to non-controlling interests
(109)
(164)
Interest paid on subordinated liabilities
(84)
(191)
(69)
(137)
Proceeds from issue of subordinated liabilities
500
1,000
Repayment of subordinated liabilities
(696)
(1,623)
(316)
(1,068)
Change in non-controlling interests
(500)
Net cash used in financing activities
(890)
(1,478)
(885)
(1,205)
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents
(1)
1
Change in cash and cash equivalents
9
76
(1,141)
(733)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year
865
789
3,721
4,454
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year
37(D)
874
865
2,580
3,721
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
HBOS plc
Cash flow statements
for the year ended 31 December 2021
27
Note 1: Basis of preparation
The consolidated financial statements of HBOS plc (the Company) together with its subsidiary undertakings (the Group) have been prepared in
accordance with international accounting standards in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. The financial statements
have also been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards
Board (IASB).
The financial information has been prepared under the historical cost convention, as modified by the revaluation of investment properties,
financial assets measured at fair value through other comprehensive income, trading securities and certain other financial assets and liabilities at
fair value through profit or loss and all derivative contracts. The Directors consider that it is appropriate to continue to adopt the going concern
basis in preparing the financial statements. In reaching this assessment, the Directors have considered the implications of the short-term
impacts of the COVID-19 pandemic and climate change upon the Group’s performance and projected funding and capital position. The
Directors have also taken into account the impact of further stress scenarios.
The IASB has issued a number of minor amendments to IFRSs effective 1 January 2022 and in later years (including IFRS 9 Financial Instruments
and IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets). These amendments are not expected to have a significant impact on the
Group.
In 2019 the Group adopted IFRS 16 and amendments to IAS 12 and early-adopted the hedge accounting amendments Interest Rate Benchmark
Reform issued by the IASB. In 2021, the Group has adopted the Interest Rate Benchmark Reform Phase 2 amendments issued by the IASB.
These amendments require that changes to expected future cash flows that both arise as a direct result of IBOR Reform and are economically
equivalent to the previous cash flows are accounted for as a change to the effective interest rate with no adjustment to the asset’s or liability’s
carrying value; no immediate gain or loss is recognised. The new requirements also provide relief from the requirements to discontinue hedge
accounting as a result of amending hedge documentation if the changes are required solely as a result of IBOR Reform. The amendments do
not have a material impact on the Group’s comparatives, which have not been restated.
IFRS 8 Operating Segments requires reporting of financial and descriptive information about operating segments which are based on how
financial information is reported and evaluated internally. The chief operating decision-maker has been identified as the Group Executive
Committee of Lloyds Banking Group. The HBOS Group is managed on an entity basis and not by segment. The Group Executive Committee
does not assess the HBOS Group’s performance and allocate resources across any segments, accordingly no segmental information is
provided. A brief overview of the Group’s sources of income is provided in the Business review. The ultimate parent undertaking, Lloyds
Banking Group plc, produces consolidated accounts which set out the basis of the segments through which it manages performance and
allocates resources across the consolidated Lloyds Banking Group.
Property, plant and equipment and capitalised software enhancements, previously presented separately on the face of the balance sheet, are
now both included within other assets (note 17). Repurchase agreements, previously reported within deposits from banks are now shown
separately on the face of the balance sheet. There has been no change in the basis of accounting for any of the underlying transactions.
Comparatives have been presented on a consistent basis for all of the above.
Note 2: Accounting policies
The accounting policies are set out below. These accounting policies have been applied consistently.
(A)Consolidation
The assets, liabilities and results of Group undertakings (including structured entities) are included in the financial statements on the basis of
accounts made up to the reporting date. Group undertakings include subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures. Details of the Group’s
subsidiaries and related undertakings are given on page 99.
(1)Subsidiaries
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. The Group controls an entity when it has power over the entity, is exposed to, or has rights to,
variable returns from its involvement with the entity, and has the ability to affect those returns through the exercise of its power. This generally
accompanies a shareholding of more than one half of the voting rights although in certain circumstances a holding of less than one half of the
voting rights may still result in the ability of the Group to exercise control. The existence and effect of potential voting rights that are currently
exercisable or convertible are considered when assessing whether the Group controls another entity. The Group reassesses whether or not it
controls an entity if facts and circumstances indicate that there are changes to any of the above elements. Subsidiaries are fully consolidated
from the date on which control is transferred to the Group; they are de-consolidated from the date that control ceases.
Structured entities are entities that are designed so that their activities are not governed by way of voting rights. In assessing whether the Group
has power over such entities in which it has an interest, the Group considers factors such as the purpose and design of the entity; its practical
ability to direct the relevant activities of the entity; the nature of the relationship with the entity; and the size of its exposure to the variability of
returns of the entity.
The treatment of transactions with non-controlling interests depends on whether, as a result of the transaction, the Group loses control of the
subsidiary. Changes in the parent’s ownership interest in a subsidiary that do not result in a loss of control are accounted for as equity
transactions; any difference between the amount by which the non-controlling interests are adjusted and the fair value of the consideration paid
or received is recognised directly in equity and attributed to the owners of the parent entity. Where the Group loses control of the subsidiary, at
the date when control is lost the amount of any non-controlling interest in that former subsidiary is derecognised and any investment retained in
the former subsidiary is remeasured to its fair value; the gain or loss that is recognised in profit or loss on the partial disposal of the subsidiary
includes the gain or loss on the remeasurement of the retained interest.
Intercompany transactions, balances and unrealised gains and losses on transactions between Group companies are eliminated.
The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for business combinations by the Group. The consideration for the acquisition of a
subsidiary is the fair value of the assets transferred, the liabilities incurred and the equity interests issued by the Group. The consideration
includes the fair value of any asset or liability resulting from a contingent consideration arrangement. Acquisition-related costs are expensed as
incurred except those relating to the issuance of debt instruments (see (E)(4) below) or share capital (see (O) below). Identifiable assets acquired
and liabilities assumed in a business combination are measured initially at their fair value at the acquisition date.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
28
(2)Joint ventures and associates
Joint ventures are joint arrangements over which the Group has joint control with other parties and has rights to the net assets of the
arrangements. Joint control is the contractually agreed sharing of control of an arrangement and only exists when decisions about the relevant
activities require the unanimous consent of the parties sharing control. Associates are entities over which the Group has significant influence.
Significant influence is the power to participate in the financial and operating policy decisions of the entity, but is not control or joint control of
those policies, and is generally achieved through holding between 20 per cent and 50 per cent of the voting share capital of the entity.
The Group utilises the venture capital exemption for investments where significant influence or joint control is present and the business unit
operates as a venture capital business. These investments are designated at initial recognition at fair value through profit or loss. Otherwise, the
Group’s investments in joint ventures and associates are accounted for by the equity method of accounting.
(B)Goodwill
Goodwill arises on business combinations and represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of the
identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities acquired. Where the fair value of the Group’s share of the identifiable assets, liabilities
and contingent liabilities of the acquired entity is greater than the cost of acquisition, the excess is recognised immediately in the income
statement.
Goodwill is recognised as an asset at cost and is tested at least annually for impairment. If an impairment is identified the carrying value of the
goodwill is written down immediately through the income statement and is not subsequently reversed. At the date of disposal of a subsidiary,
the carrying value of attributable goodwill is included in the calculation of the profit or loss on disposal.
(C)Other intangible assets
Intangible assets which have been determined to have a finite useful life are amortised on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful life as
follows: up to 7 years for capitalised software; 10 to 15 years for brands and other intangible assets.
Intangible assets with finite useful lives are reviewed at each reporting date to assess whether there is any indication that they are impaired. If
any such indication exists the recoverable amount of the asset is determined and in the event that the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its
recoverable amount, it is written down immediately.
(D)Revenue recognition
(1)Net interest income
Interest income and expense are recognised in the income statement using the effective interest method for all interest-bearing financial
instruments, except for those classified at fair value through profit or loss. The effective interest method is a method of calculating the
amortised cost of a financial asset or liability and of allocating the interest income or interest expense over the expected life of the financial
instrument. The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts the estimated future cash payments or receipts over the expected life of
the financial instrument to the gross carrying amount of the financial asset (before adjusting for expected credit losses) or to the amortised cost
of the financial liability, including early redemption fees, other fees, and premiums and discounts that are an integral part of the overall return. In
the case of financial assets that are purchased or originated credit-impaired, the effective interest rate is the rate that discounts the estimated
future cash flows to the amortised cost of the instrument. Direct incremental transaction costs related to the acquisition, issue or disposal of a
financial instrument are also taken into account. Interest income from non-credit impaired financial assets is recognised by applying the
effective interest rate to the gross carrying amount of the asset; for credit impaired financial assets, the effective interest rate is applied to the
net carrying amount after deducting the allowance for expected credit losses. Impairment policies are set out in (H) below.
(2)Fee and commission income and expense
Fees and commissions receivable which are not an integral part of the effective interest rate are recognised as income as the Group fulfils its
performance obligations. The Group’s principal performance obligations arising from contracts with customers are in respect of value added
current accounts, credit cards and debit cards. These fees are received, and the Group provides the service, monthly; the fees are recognised in
income on this basis. The Group also receives certain fees in respect of its asset finance business where the performance obligations are
typically fulfilled towards the end of the customer contract; these fees are recognised in income on this basis. Where it is unlikely that the loan
commitments will be drawn, loan commitment fees are recognised in fee and commission income over the life of the facility, rather than as an
adjustment to the effective interest rate for loans expected to be drawn. Incremental costs incurred to generate fee and commission income are
charged to fees and commissions expense as they are incurred.
(3)Other
Dividend income is recognised when the right to receive payment is established.
Revenue recognition policies specific to trading income are set out in (E)(3) below; those relating to leases are set out in (J)(1) below.
(E)Financial assets and liabilities
On initial recognition, financial assets are classified as measured at amortised cost, fair value through other comprehensive income or fair value
through profit or loss, depending on the Group’s business model for managing the financial assets and whether the cash flows represent solely
payments of principal and interest. The Group assesses its business models at a portfolio level based on its objectives for the relevant portfolio,
how the performance of the portfolio is managed and reported, and the frequency of asset sales. Financial assets with embedded derivatives
are considered in their entirety when considering their cash flow characteristics. The Group reclassifies financial assets only when its business
model for managing those assets changes. A reclassification will only take place when the change is significant to the Group’s operations and
will occur at a portfolio level and not for individual instruments; reclassifications are expected to be rare.
The Group initially recognises loans and advances, deposits, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities when the Group becomes a
party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. Regular way purchases and sales of securities and other financial assets and trading
liabilities are recognised on trade date, being the date that the Group is committed to purchase or sell an asset.
Financial assets are derecognised when the contractual right to receive cash flows from those assets has expired or when the Group has
transferred its contractual right to receive the cash flows from the assets and either: substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership have
been transferred; or the Group has neither retained nor transferred substantially all of the risks and rewards, but has transferred control.
Financial liabilities are derecognised when the obligation is discharged, cancelled or expires.
(1)Financial instruments measured at amortised cost
Financial assets that are held to collect contractual cash flows where those cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest are
measured at amortised cost. A basic lending arrangement results in contractual cash flows that are solely payments of principal and interest on
the principal amount outstanding. Where the contractual cash flows introduce exposure to risks or volatility unrelated to a basic lending
arrangement such as changes in equity prices or commodity prices, the payments do not comprise solely principal and interest. Financial assets
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 2: Accounting policies (continued)
29
measured at amortised cost are predominantly loans and advances to customers and banks together with certain debt securities used by the
Group to manage its liquidity. Loans and advances are initially recognised when cash is advanced to the borrower at fair value inclusive of
transaction costs. Interest income is accounted for using the effective interest method (see (D) above).
Financial liabilities are measured at amortised cost, except for trading liabilities and other financial liabilities designated at fair value through
profit or loss on initial recognition which are held at fair value.
Where changes are made to the contractual cash flows of a financial asset or financial liability that are economically equivalent and arise as a
direct consequence of interest rate benchmark reform, the Group updates the effective interest rate and does not recognise an immediate gain
or loss.
(2)Financial assets measured at fair value through other comprehensive income
Financial assets that are held to collect contractual cash flows and for subsequent sale, where the assets’ cash flows represent solely payments
of principal and interest, are recognised in the balance sheet at their fair value, inclusive of transaction costs. Interest calculated using the
effective interest method and foreign exchange gains and losses on assets denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the income
statement. All other gains and losses arising from changes in fair value are recognised directly in other comprehensive income, until the financial
asset is either sold or matures, at which time the cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in other comprehensive income is recognised in
the income statement other than in respect of equity shares, for which the cumulative revaluation amount is transferred directly to retained
profits. The Group recognises a charge for expected credit losses in the income statement (see (H) below). As the asset is measured at fair
value, the charge does not adjust the carrying value of the asset, it is reflected in other comprehensive income.
(3)Financial instruments measured at fair value through profit or loss
Financial assets are classified at fair value through profit or loss where they do not meet the criteria to be measured at amortised cost or fair
value through other comprehensive income or where they are designated at fair value through profit or loss to reduce an accounting mismatch.
All derivatives are carried at fair value through profit or loss. Derivatives are carried on the balance sheet as assets when their fair value is
positive and as liabilities when their fair value is negative. Refer to note 33(3) (Financial instruments: Financial assets and liabilities carried at fair
value) for details of valuation techniques and significant inputs to valuation models.
Derivatives embedded in a financial asset are not considered separately; the financial asset is considered in its entirety when determining
whether its cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest. Derivatives embedded in financial liabilities are treated as separate
derivatives when their economic characteristics and risks are not closely related to those of the host contract and the host contract is not carried
at fair value through profit or loss. These embedded derivatives are measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in the income
statement.
Trading securities, which are debt securities and equity shares acquired principally for the purpose of selling in the short term or which are part
of a portfolio which is managed for short-term gains, do not meet these criteria and are also measured at fair value through profit or loss.
Financial assets measured at fair value through profit or loss are recognised in the balance sheet at their fair value. Fair value gains and losses
together with interest coupons and dividend income are recognised in the income statement within net trading income.
Financial liabilities are measured at fair value through profit or loss where they are trading liabilities or where they are designated at fair value
through profit or loss in order to reduce an accounting mismatch; where the liabilities are part of a group of liabilities (or assets and liabilities)
which is managed, and its performance evaluated, on a fair value basis; or where the liabilities contain one or more embedded derivatives that
significantly modify the cash flows arising under the contract and would otherwise need to be separately accounted for. Financial liabilities
measured at fair value through profit or loss are recognised in the balance sheet at their fair value. Fair value gains and losses are recognised in
the income statement within net trading income in the period in which they occur.
The fair values of assets and liabilities traded in active markets are based on current bid and offer prices, respectively, which include the
expected effects of potential changes to laws and regulations, risks associated with climate change and other factors. If the market is not active
the Group establishes a fair value by using valuation techniques. The fair values of derivative financial instruments are adjusted where
appropriate to reflect credit risk (via credit valuation adjustments (CVAs), debit valuation adjustments (DVAs) and funding valuation adjustments
(FVAs)), market liquidity and other risks.
(4)Borrowings
Borrowings (which include deposits from banks, customer deposits, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities) are recognised initially
at fair value, being their issue proceeds net of transaction costs incurred. These instruments are subsequently stated at amortised cost using the
effective interest method.
Preference shares and other instruments which carry a mandatory coupon or are redeemable on a specific date are classified as financial
liabilities. The coupon on these instruments is recognised in the income statement as interest expense. Securities which carry a discretionary
coupon and have no fixed maturity or redemption date are classified as other equity instruments. Interest payments on these securities are
recognised as distributions from equity in the period in which they are paid. An exchange of financial liabilities on substantially different terms is
accounted for as an extinguishment of the original financial liability and the recognition of a new financial liability. The difference between the
carrying amount of a financial liability extinguished and the new financial liability is recognised in profit or loss together with any related costs or
fees incurred.
When a financial liability is exchanged for an equity instrument, the new equity instrument is recognised at fair value and any difference between
the carrying value of the liability and the fair value of the new equity is recognised in profit or loss.
(5)Sale and repurchase agreements (including securities lending and borrowing)
Securities sold subject to repurchase agreements (repos) continue to be recognised on the balance sheet where substantially all of the risks and
rewards are retained. Funds received for repos carried at fair value are included within trading liabilities. Conversely, securities purchased under
agreements to resell (reverse repos), where the Group does not acquire substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership, are measured at
amortised cost or at fair value. Those measured at fair value are recognised within trading securities. The difference between sale and
repurchase price is treated as interest and accrued over the life of the agreements using the effective interest method.
Securities borrowing and lending transactions are typically secured; collateral takes the form of securities or cash advanced or received.
Securities lent to counterparties are retained on the balance sheet. Securities borrowed are not recognised on the balance sheet, unless these
are sold to third parties, in which case the obligation to return them is recorded at fair value as a trading liability. Cash collateral given or
received is treated as a loan and advance measured at amortised cost or customer deposit.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 2: Accounting policies (continued)
30
(F)Hedge accounting
As permitted by IFRS 9, the Group continues to apply the requirements of IAS 39 to its hedging relationships.
Changes in the fair value of all derivative instruments, other than those in effective cash flow and net investment hedging relationships, are
recognised immediately in the income statement. As noted in (2) below, the change in fair value of a derivative in an effective cash flow hedging
relationship is allocated between the income statement and other comprehensive income.
Hedge accounting allows one financial instrument, generally a derivative such as a swap, to be designated as a hedge of another financial
instrument such as a loan or deposit or a portfolio of such instruments. At the inception of the hedge relationship, formal documentation is
drawn up specifying the hedging strategy, the hedged item, the hedging instrument and the methodology that will be used to measure the
effectiveness of the hedge relationship in offsetting changes in the fair value or cash flow of the hedged risk. The effectiveness of the hedging
relationship is tested both at inception and throughout its life and if at any point it is concluded that it is no longer highly effective in achieving
its documented objective, hedge accounting is discontinued. Note 12 provides details of the types of derivatives held by the Group and
presents separately those designated in hedge relationships.
Where there is uncertainty arising from interest rate benchmark reform, the Group assumes that the interest rate benchmark on which the
hedged cash flows and/or the hedged risk are based, or the interest rate benchmark on which the cash flows of the hedging instrument are
based, are not altered as a result of interest rate benchmark reform. The Group does not discontinue a hedging relationship during the period
of uncertainty arising from the interest rate benchmark reform solely because the actual results of the hedge are not highly effective.
Where the contractual terms of a financial asset, financial liability or derivative are amended, on an economically equivalent basis, as a direct
consequence of interest rate benchmark reform, the uncertainty arising from the reform is no longer present. In these circumstances, the Group
amends the hedge documentation to reflect the changes required by the reform; these changes to the documentation do not in and of
themselves result in the discontinuation of hedge accounting or require the designation of a new hedge relationship.
(1)Fair value hedges
Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with
the changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk; this also applies if the hedged asset is
classified as a financial asset at fair value through other comprehensive income. If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting,
changes in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk are no longer recognised in the income statement. The cumulative
adjustment that has been made to the carrying amount of the hedged item is amortised to the income statement using the effective interest
method over the period to maturity.
(2)Cash flow hedges
The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is recognised in other
comprehensive income in the cash flow hedging reserve. The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the
income statement. Amounts accumulated in equity are reclassified to the income statement in the periods in which the hedged item affects
profit or loss. When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative
gain or loss existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised in the income statement when the forecast transaction is
ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was
reported in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement.
(G)Offset
Financial assets and liabilities are offset and the net amount reported in the balance sheet when there is a legally enforceable right of offset and
there is an intention to settle on a net basis, or realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. Cash collateral on exchange traded
derivative transactions is presented gross unless the collateral cash flows are always settled net with the derivative cash flows. In certain
situations, even though master netting agreements exist, the lack of management intention to settle on a net basis results in the financial assets
and liabilities being reported gross on the balance sheet.
(H)Impairment of financial assets
The impairment charge in the income statement reflects the change in expected credit losses, including those arising from fraud. Expected
credit losses are recognised for loans and advances to customers and banks, other financial assets held at amortised cost, financial assets (other
than equity investments) measured at fair value through other comprehensive income, and certain loan commitments and financial guarantee
contracts. Expected credit losses are calculated as an unbiased and probability-weighted estimate using an appropriate probability of default,
adjusted to take into account a range of possible future economic scenarios, and applying this to the estimated exposure of the Group at the
point of default after taking into account the value of any collateral held, repayments, or other mitigants of loss and including the impact of
discounting using the effective interest rate.
At initial recognition, allowance (or provision in the case of some loan commitments and financial guarantees) is made for expected credit losses
resulting from default events that are possible within the next 12 months (12-month expected credit losses). In the event of a significant increase
in credit risk since origination, allowance (or provision) is made for expected credit losses resulting from all possible default events over the
expected life of the financial instrument (lifetime expected credit losses). Financial assets where 12-month expected credit losses are recognised
are considered to be Stage 1; financial assets which are considered to have experienced a significant increase in credit risk since initial
recognition are in Stage 2; and financial assets which have defaulted or are otherwise considered to be credit-impaired are allocated to Stage 3.
Some Stage 3 assets are subject to individual rather than collective assessment. Such cases are subject to a risk-based impairment sanctioning
process, and these are reviewed and updated at least quarterly, or more frequently if there is a significant change in the credit profile. The
collective assessment of impairment aggregates financial instruments with similar risk characteristics, such as whether the facility is revolving in
nature or secured and the type of security against financial assets.
An assessment of whether credit risk has increased significantly since initial recognition considers the change in the risk of default occurring over
the remaining expected life of the financial instrument. In determining whether there has been a significant increase in credit risk, the Group
uses quantitative tests based on relative and absolute probability of default (PD) movements linked to internal credit ratings together with
qualitative indicators such as watchlists and other indicators of historical delinquency, credit weakness or financial difficulty. The use of internal
credit ratings and qualitative indicators ensures alignment between the assessment of staging and the Group’s management of credit risk which
utilises these internal metrics within distinct retail and commercial portfolio risk management practices. However, unless identified at an earlier
stage, the credit risk of financial assets is deemed to have increased significantly when more than 30 days past due. The use of a payment
holiday in and of itself has not been judged to indicate a significant increase in credit risk, with the underlying long-term credit risk deemed to
be driven by economic conditions and captured through the use of forward-looking models. These portfolio-level models are capturing the
anticipated volume of increased defaults and therefore an appropriate assessment of staging and expected credit loss. Where the credit risk
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 2: Accounting policies (continued)
31
subsequently improves such that it no longer represents a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition, the asset is transferred back
to Stage 1.
Assets are transferred to Stage 3 when they have defaulted or are otherwise considered to be credit-impaired. Default is considered to have
occurred when there is evidence that the customer is experiencing financial difficulty which is likely to affect significantly the ability to repay the
amount due. IFRS 9 contains a rebuttable presumption that default occurs no later than when a payment is 90 days past due. The Group uses
this 90 day backstop for all its products except for UK mortgages. For UK mortgages, the Group uses a backstop of 180 days past due as
mortgage exposures more than 90 days past due, but less than 180 days, typically show high cure rates and this aligns with the Group’s risk
management practices. Key differences between Stage 3 balances and non-performing loans relate to the use of 180 days past due for Stage 3
mortgages and to the cure periods applied to forbearance exposures. The use of payment holidays is not considered to be an automatic trigger
of regulatory default and therefore does not automatically trigger Stage 3. Days past due will also not accumulate on any accounts that have
taken a payment holiday including those already past due.
In certain circumstances, the Group will renegotiate the original terms of a customer’s loan, either as part of an ongoing customer relationship
or in response to adverse changes in the circumstances of the borrower. In the latter circumstances, the loan will remain classified as either
Stage 2 or Stage 3 until the credit risk has improved such that it no longer represents a significant increase since origination (for a return to
Stage 1), or the loan is no longer credit-impaired (for a return to Stage 2). On renegotiation the gross carrying amount of the loan is recalculated
as the present value of the renegotiated or modified contractual cash flows, which are discounted at the original effective interest rate.
Renegotiation may also lead to the loan and associated allowance being derecognised and a new loan being recognised initially at fair value.
A loan or advance is normally written off, either partially or in full, against the related allowance when the proceeds from realising any available
security have been received or there is no realistic prospect of recovery and the amount of the loss has been determined. Subsequent
recoveries of amounts previously written off decrease the amount of impairment losses recorded in the income statement. For both secured
and unsecured retail balances, the write-off takes place only once an extensive set of collections processes has been completed, or the status of
the account reaches a point where policy dictates that continuing attempts to recover are no longer appropriate. For commercial lending, a
write-off occurs if the loan facility with the customer is restructured, the asset is under administration and the only monies that can be received
are the amounts estimated by the administrator, the underlying assets are disposed and a decision is made that no further settlement monies
will be received, or external evidence (for example, third-party valuations) is available that there has been an irreversible decline in expected
cash flows.
(I)Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment (other than investment property) is included at cost less accumulated depreciation. The value of land (included in
premises) is not depreciated. Depreciation on other assets is calculated using the straight-line method to allocate the difference between the
cost and the residual value over their estimated useful lives, as follows: the shorter of 50 years and the remaining period of the lease for
freehold/long and short leasehold premises; the shorter of 10 years and, if lease renewal is not likely, the remaining period of the lease for
leasehold improvements; 10 to 20 years for fixtures and furnishings; and 2 to 8 years for other equipment and motor vehicles.
The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, taking into account considerations such as potential changes to legislation, including
those that are climate-related, as well as other factors, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet date.
Assets are reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. In
assessing the recoverable amount of assets the Group considers the effects of potential or actual changes in legislation, customer behaviour,
climate-related risks and other factors. In the event that an asset’s carrying amount is determined to be greater than its recoverable amount it is
written down immediately. The recoverable amount is the higher of the asset’s fair value less costs to sell and its value in use.
Investment property comprises freehold and long leasehold land and buildings that are held either to earn rental income or for capital accretion
or both. In accordance with the guidance published by the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors, investment property is carried at fair value
based on current prices for similar properties, adjusted for the specific characteristics of the property (such as location or condition). If this
information is not available, the Group uses alternative valuation methods such as discounted cash flow projections or recent prices in less
active markets. These valuations are reviewed at least annually by independent professionally qualified valuers. Investment property being
redeveloped for continuing use as investment property, or for which the market has become less active, continues to be valued at fair value.
(J)Leases
Under IFRS 16, a lessor is required to determine whether a lease is a finance or operating lease. A lessee is not required to make this
determination.
(1)As lessor
Assets leased to customers are classified as finance leases if the lease agreements transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership to
the lessee but not necessarily legal title. All other leases are classified as operating leases. When assets are subject to finance leases, the
present value of the lease payments, together with any unguaranteed residual value, is recognised as a receivable, net of allowances for
expected credit losses and residual value impairment, within loans and advances to banks and customers. The difference between the gross
receivable and the present value of the receivable is recognised as unearned finance lease income. Finance lease income is recognised in
interest income over the term of the lease using the net investment method (before tax) so as to give a constant rate of return on the net
investment in the leases. Unguaranteed residual values are reviewed regularly to identify any impairment.
Operating lease assets are included within other assets at cost and depreciated over their estimated useful lives, which equates to the lives of
the leases, after taking into account anticipated residual values. Operating lease rental income is recognised on a straight-line basis over the life
of the lease.
The Group evaluates non-lease arrangements such as outsourcing and similar contracts to determine if they contain a lease which is then
accounted for separately.
(2)As lessee
Leases are recognised as a right-of-use asset and a corresponding liability at the date at which the leased asset is available for use by the
Group. Assets and liabilities arising from a lease are initially measured on a present value basis. The lease payments are discounted using the
interest rate implicit in the lease, if that rate can be determined, or the Group’s incremental borrowing rate appropriate for the right-of-use
asset arising from the lease and the liability recognised within other liabilities.
Lease payments are allocated between the liability and finance cost. The finance cost is charged to profit or loss over the lease period so as to
produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period. The right-of-use asset is depreciated over
the shorter of the asset's useful life and the lease term on a straight-line basis.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 2: Accounting policies (continued)
32
Payments associated with short-term leases and leases of low-value assets are recognised on a straight-line basis as an expense in profit or loss.
Short-term leases are leases with a lease term of twelve months or less. Low-value assets comprise IT equipment and small items of office
furniture.
(K)Employee benefits
Short-term employee benefits, such as salaries, paid absences, performance-based cash awards and social security costs, are recognised over
the period in which the employees provide the related services.
(1)Pension schemes
The Group operates a number of post-retirement benefit schemes for its employees including both defined benefit and defined contribution
pension plans. A defined benefit scheme is a pension plan that defines an amount of pension benefit that an employee will receive on
retirement, dependent on one or more factors such as age, years of service and salary. A defined contribution plan is a pension plan into which
the Group pays fixed contributions; there is no legal or constructive obligation to pay further contributions.
Scheme assets are included at their fair value and scheme liabilities are measured on an actuarial basis using the projected unit credit method.
The defined benefit scheme liabilities are discounted using rates equivalent to the market yields at the balance sheet date on high-quality
corporate bonds that are denominated in the currency in which the benefits will be paid, and that have terms to maturity approximating to the
terms of the related pension liability. The Group’s income statement charge includes the current service cost of providing pension benefits, past
service costs, net interest expense (income), and plan administration costs that are not deducted from the return on plan assets. Past service
costs, which represents the change in the present value of the defined benefit obligation resulting from a plan amendment or curtailment, are
recognised when the plan amendment or curtailment occurs. Net interest expense (income) is calculated by applying the discount rate at the
beginning of the period to the net defined benefit liability or asset.
Remeasurements, comprising actuarial gains and losses, the return on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest expense (income)
and net of the cost of managing the plan assets), and the effect of changes to the asset ceiling (if applicable) are reflected immediately in the
balance sheet with a charge or credit recognised in other comprehensive income in the period in which they occur. Remeasurements
recognised in other comprehensive income are reflected immediately in retained profits and will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or
loss.
The Group’s balance sheet includes the net surplus or deficit, being the difference between the fair value of scheme assets and the discounted
value of scheme liabilities at the balance sheet date. Surpluses are only recognised to the extent that they are recoverable through reduced
contributions in the future or through refunds from the schemes. In assessing whether a surplus is recoverable, the Group considers (i) its current
right to obtain a refund or a reduction in future contributions and (ii) the rights of other parties existing at the balance sheet date. In
determining the rights of third parties existing at the balance sheet date, the Group does not anticipate any future acts by other parties.
The costs of the Group’s defined contribution plans are charged to the income statement in the period in which they fall due.
(2)Share-based compensation
Lloyds Banking Group operates a number of equity-settled, share-based compensation plans in respect of services received from certain of its
employees. The value of the employee services received in exchange for equity instruments granted under these plans is recognised as an
expense over the vesting period of the instruments, with a corresponding increase in equity. This expense is determined by reference to the fair
value of the number of equity instruments that are expected to vest. The fair value of equity instruments granted is based on market prices, if
available, at the date of grant. In the absence of market prices, the fair value of the instruments at the date of grant is estimated using an
appropriate valuation technique, such as a Black-Scholes option pricing model or a Monte Carlo simulation. The determination of fair values
excludes the impact of any non-market vesting conditions, which are included in the assumptions used to estimate the number of options that
are expected to vest. At each balance sheet date, this estimate is reassessed and if necessary revised. Any revision of the original estimate is
recognised in the income statement, together with a corresponding adjustment to equity. Cancellations by employees of contributions to the
Group’s Save As You Earn plans are treated as non-vesting conditions and the Group recognises, in the year of cancellation, the amount of the
expense that would have otherwise been recognised over the remainder of the vesting period. Modifications are assessed at the date of
modification and any incremental charges are charged to the income statement.
(L)Taxation
Tax expense comprises current and deferred tax. Current and deferred tax are charged or credited in the income statement except to the
extent that the tax arises from a transaction or event which is recognised, in the same or a different period, outside the income statement (either
in other comprehensive income, directly in equity, or through a business combination), in which case the tax appears in the same statement as
the transaction that gave rise to it. The tax consequences of the Group's dividend payments (including distributions on other equity
instruments), if any, are charged or credited to the statement in which the profit distributed originally arose.
Current tax is the amount of corporate income taxes expected to be payable or recoverable based on the profit for the period as adjusted for
items that are not taxable or not deductible, and is calculated using tax rates and laws that were enacted or substantively enacted at the
balance sheet date.
Current tax includes amounts provided in respect of uncertain tax positions when management expects that, upon examination of the
uncertainty by Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs (HMRC) or other relevant tax authority, it is more likely than not that an economic outflow
will occur. Provisions reflect management’s best estimate of the ultimate liability based on their interpretation of tax law, precedent and
guidance, informed by external tax advice as necessary. Changes in facts and circumstances underlying these provisions are reassessed at each
balance sheet date, and the provisions are remeasured as required to reflect current information.
Deferred tax is recognised on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the
balance sheet. Deferred tax is calculated using tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date,
and which are expected to apply when the related deferred tax asset is realised or the deferred tax liability is settled.
Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences but not recognised for taxable temporary differences
arising on investments in subsidiaries where the reversal of the temporary difference can be controlled and it is probable that the difference will
not reverse in the foreseeable future. Deferred tax liabilities are not recognised on temporary differences that arise from goodwill which is not
deductible for tax purposes.
Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent it is probable that taxable profits will be available against which the deductible temporary
differences can be utilised, and are reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that sufficient
taxable profits will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 2: Accounting policies (continued)
33
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are not recognised in respect of temporary differences that arise on initial recognition of assets and liabilities
acquired other than in a business combination. Deferred tax is not discounted.
(M)Foreign currency translation
Items included in the financial statements of each of the Group’s entities are measured using the currency of the primary economic environment
in which the entity operates (the functional currency). Foreign currency transactions are translated into the appropriate functional currency using
the exchange rates prevailing at the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such
transactions and from the translation at year end exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are
recognised in the income statement, except when recognised in other comprehensive income as qualifying cash flow or net investment hedges.
Non-monetary assets that are measured at fair value are translated using the exchange rate at the date that the fair value was determined.
Translation differences on equities and similar non-monetary items held at fair value through profit and loss are recognised in profit or loss as
part of the fair value gain or loss. Translation differences on non-monetary financial assets measured at fair value through other comprehensive
income, such as equity shares, are included in the fair value reserve in equity unless the asset is a hedged item in a fair value hedge.
The results and financial position of all Group entities that have a functional currency different from the presentation currency are translated into
the presentation currency as follows: the assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the
acquisition of a foreign entity, are translated into sterling at foreign exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date; and the income and
expenses of foreign operations are translated into sterling at average exchange rates unless these do not approximate to the foreign exchange
rates ruling at the dates of the transactions, in which case income and expenses are translated at the dates of the transactions.
Foreign exchange differences arising on the translation of a foreign operation are recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated
in a separate component of equity. On disposal or liquidation of a foreign operation, the cumulative amount of exchange differences relating to
that foreign operation is reclassified from equity and included in determining the profit or loss arising on disposal or liquidation.
(N)Provisions and contingent liabilities
Provisions are recognised in respect of present obligations arising from past events where it is probable that outflows of resources will be
required to settle the obligations and they can be reliably estimated.
Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose existence depends on the outcome of uncertain future events or those present obligations
where the outflows of resources are uncertain or cannot be measured reliably. Contingent liabilities are not recognised in the financial
statements but are disclosed unless they are remote.
Provision is made for expected credit losses in respect of irrevocable undrawn loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts (see (H)
above).
(O)Share capital
Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options or to the acquisition of a business are shown in equity as a
deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds. Dividends paid on the Group’s ordinary shares are recognised as a reduction in equity in the period in
which they are paid.
(P)Cash and cash equivalents
For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents comprise cash and non-mandatory balances with central banks and
amounts due from banks with an original maturity of less than three months.
(Q)Investment in subsidiaries
Investments in subsidiaries are carried at historical cost, less any provisions for impairment.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 2: Accounting policies (continued)
34
The preparation of the Group’s financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires management to make judgements, estimates and
assumptions in applying the accounting policies that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Due to the
inherent uncertainty in making estimates, actual results reported in future periods may be based upon amounts which differ from those
estimates. Estimates, judgements and assumptions are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including
expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. In preparing the financial statements, the Group has
considered the impact of climate-related risks on its financial position and performance. While the effects of climate change represent a source
of uncertainty, the Group does not consider there to be a material impact on its judgements and estimates from the physical, transition and
other climate-related risks in the short to medium term.
The significant judgements, apart from those involving estimation, made by management in applying the Group’s accounting policies in these
financial statements (key judgements) and the key sources of estimation uncertainty that may have a significant risk of causing a material
adjustment to the carrying amount of assets and liabilities within the next financial year (key estimates), which together are considered critical to
the Group’s results and financial position, are as follows:
Allowance for expected credit losses
Key judgements:
Determining an appropriate definition of default against which a probability of default, exposure at default and loss given
default parameter can be evaluated
The appropriate lifetime of an exposure to credit risk for the assessment of lifetime losses, notably on revolving products
Establishing the criteria for a significant increase in credit risk (SICR)
The use of management judgement alongside impairment modelling processes to adjust inputs, parameters and outputs
to reflect risks not captured by models
Key estimates:
Base case and multiple economic scenarios (MES) assumptions, including the rate of unemployment and the rate of
change of house prices, required for creation of MES scenarios and forward-looking credit parameters
These judgements and estimates are subject to significant uncertainty.
The Group recognises an allowance for expected credit losses (ECLs) for loans and advances to customers and banks, other financial assets held
at amortised cost, financial assets (other than equity investments) measured at fair value through other comprehensive income and certain loan
commitment and financial guarantee contracts. At 31 December 2021, the Group’s expected credit loss allowance was £2,638 million (2020:
£3,330 million), of which £2,582 million (2020: £3,201 million) was in respect of drawn balances.
The calculation of the Group’s expected credit loss allowances and provisions against loan commitments and guarantees under IFRS 9 requires
the Group to make a number of judgements, assumptions and estimates. The most significant are set out below.
Definition of default
The probability of default (PD) of an exposure, both over a 12-month period and over its lifetime, is a key input to the measurement of the ECL
allowance. Default has occurred when there is evidence that the customer is experiencing significant financial difficulty which is likely to affect
the ability to repay amounts due. The definition of default adopted by the Group is described in note 2(H) Impairment of financial assets. The
Group has rebutted the presumption in IFRS 9 that default occurs no later than when a payment is 90 days past due for UK mortgages. As a
result, at 31 December 2021, £0.8 billion of UK mortgages (2020: £1.0 billion) were classified as Stage 2 rather than Stage 3; the impact on the
Group’s ECL allowance was not material.
Lifetime of an exposure
A range of approaches, segmented by product type, has been adopted by the Group to estimate a product’s expected life. These include using
the full contractual life and taking into account behavioural factors such as early repayments, extensions and refinancing. For non-revolving retail
assets, the Group has assumed the expected life for each product to be the time taken for all significant losses to be observed. For retail
revolving products, the Group has considered the losses beyond the contractual term over which the Group is exposed to credit risk. For
commercial overdraft facilities, the average behavioural life has been used. Changes to the assumed expected lives of the Group’s assets could
impact the ECL allowance recognised by the Group. The assessment of SICR and corresponding lifetime loss, and the PD, of a financial asset
designated as Stage 2, or Stage 3, is dependent on its expected life.
Significant increase in credit risk
Performing assets are classified as either Stage 1 or Stage 2. An ECL allowance equivalent to 12 months' expected losses is established against
assets in Stage 1; assets classified as Stage 2 carry an ECL allowance equivalent to lifetime expected losses. Assets are transferred from Stage 1
to Stage 2 when there has been a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition. Credit-impaired assets are transferred to Stage 3
with a lifetime expected losses allowance. The Group uses both quantitative and qualitative indicators to determine whether there has been a
SICR for an asset. For retail exposures, the following tables set out the retail master scale (RMS) grade triggers which result in a SICR for financial
assets and the PD boundaries for each RMS grade. Loans and overdrafts SICR triggers have been refined in 2021 following a review of sensitivity
to changes in economic assumptions, aligning to credit cards (refined in 2020). The impact of this has been £144 million of additional assets
being classified as Stage 2 at 31 December 2021, with a corresponding increase in the ECL of £7 million resulting from the transfer to a lifetime
expected loss.
SICR triggers for key retail portfolios
Origination grade
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Mortgages SICR grade
5
5
6
7
8
9
10
Credit cards, loans and overdrafts SICR grade
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RMS grade
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
PD boundary %1
0.10
0.40
0.80
1.20
2.50
4.50
7.50
10.00
14.00
20.00
30.00
45.00
99.99
100.00
1Probability-weighted annualised lifetime probability of default.
For commercial exposures a doubling of PD with a minimum increase in PD of 1 per cent and a resulting change in the underlying grade is
treated as a SICR.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 3: Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty
35
The Group uses the internal credit risk classification and watchlist as qualitative indicators to identify a SICR. The Group does not use the low
credit risk exemption in its staging assessments. The use of a payment holiday in and of itself has not been judged to indicate a significant
increase in credit risk, nor forbearance, with the underlying long-term credit risk deemed to be driven by economic conditions and captured
through the use of forward-looking models. These portfolio level models are capturing the anticipated volume of increased defaults and
therefore an appropriate assessment of staging and expected credit loss.
All financial assets are assumed to have suffered a SICR if they are more than 30 days past due; credit cards, loans and overdrafts financial assets
are also assumed to have suffered a SICR if they are in arrears on three or more separate occasions in a rolling 12-month period. Financial assets
are classified as credit-impaired if they are 90 days past due, except for UK mortgages where a 180 days backstop is used.
A Stage 3 asset that is no longer credit-impaired is transferred back to Stage 2 as no cure period is applied to Stage 3. If an exposure that is
classified as Stage 2 no longer meets the SICR criteria, which in some cases capture customer behaviour in previous periods, it is moved back to
Stage 1.
The setting of precise trigger points combined with risk indicators requires judgement. The use of different trigger points may have a material
impact upon the size of the ECL allowance. The Group monitors the effectiveness of SICR criteria on an ongoing basis.
Generation of multiple economic scenarios
The estimate of expected credit losses is required to be based on an unbiased expectation of future economic scenarios. The approach used to
generate the range of future economic scenarios depends on the methodology and judgements adopted. The Group’s approach is to start
from a defined base case scenario, used for planning purposes, and to generate alternative economic scenarios around this base case. The base
case scenario is a conditional forecast underpinned by a number of conditioning assumptions that reflect the Group’s best view of key future
developments. If circumstances appear likely to materially deviate from the conditioning assumptions, then the base case scenario is updated.
The base case scenario is central to a range of future economic scenarios generated by simulation of an economic model, for which the same
conditioning assumptions apply as in the base case scenario. These scenarios are ranked by using estimated relationships with industry-wide
historical loss data. With the base case already pre-defined, three other scenarios are identified as averages of constituent scenarios located
around the 15th, 75th and 95th percentiles of the distribution. The full distribution is therefore summarised by a practical number of scenarios to
run through ECL models representing an upside, the base case, and a downside scenario weighted at 30 per cent each, together with a severe
downside scenario weighted at 10 per cent. The scenario weights represent the distribution of economic scenarios and not subjective views on
likelihood. The inclusion of a severe downside scenario with a smaller weighting ensures that the non-linearity of losses in the tail of the
distribution is adequately captured. The Group does not apply any reversion techniques within scenario generation, noting that data after the
five-year forecast period shown has a relatively immaterial effect on the ECL provision.
A forum under the chairmanship of the Chief Economist meets at least quarterly to review and, if appropriate, recommend changes to the
method by which economic scenarios are generated, for approval by the Chief Financial Officer and Chief Risk Officer. While no material
changes were made to the model in 2021, the forum identified the need to consider an alternative approach to address interest rate risks not
captured within the downside scenarios. The forum recommended that a non-modelled severe downside scenario was evaluated for potential
incremental losses. This resulted in a management adjustment for UK mortgages which exhibited a sufficient uplift in ECL in a high rate
scenario.
Base case and MES economic assumptions
The Group’s base case economic scenario has been revised in light of the continuing impact of the coronavirus pandemic, intensifying global
inflation pressures, and a shift towards a more restrictive stance of monetary policy by central banks. The Group’s updated base case scenario
built in three key conditioning assumptions. First, the current wave of coronavirus infections does not lead to a re-imposition of lockdown
restrictions in the UK, although greater household caution is expected amid increased hospitalisation rates. Second, the rise in wholesale
energy prices is passed on to consumers through a 50 per cent increase in retail energy prices in April 2022. Third, inflation expectations rise in
response to increasing headline inflation but subsequently revert to levels consistent with the Bank of England’s 2 per cent inflation target.
Based on these assumptions and incorporating the improved economic data in the fourth quarter, the Group’s base case outlook is for a
modest rise in the unemployment rate alongside a deceleration in residential and commercial property price growth, as the UK Bank Rate is
raised in response to increasing inflationary pressures. Risks around this base case economic view lie in both directions and are partly captured
by the generation of alternative economic scenarios described above. Uncertainties relating to key epidemiological developments, notably the
possibility that a vaccine-resistant strain could emerge, are not specifically captured by these scenarios. These specific risks are recognised
outside of the modelled scenarios with a central adjustment.
The Group has accommodated the latest available information at the reporting date in defining its base case scenario and generating
alternative economic scenarios. The scenarios include forecasts for key variables in the fourth quarter of 2021, for which actuals may have since
emerged prior to publication.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 3: Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty (continued)
36
Scenarios by year
Key annual assumptions made by the Group are shown below. Gross domestic product is presented as an annual change, house price growth
and commercial real estate price growth are presented as the growth in the respective indices within the period. UK Bank Rate and
unemployment rate are averages for the period.
The key UK economic assumptions made by the Group averaged over a five-year period are also shown below. The five-year period reflects
movements within the current reporting year such that 31 December 2021 reflects the five years 2021 to 2025. The prior year comparative data
has been re-presented to align to the equivalent period, 2020 to 2024. The inclusion of the reporting year within the five-year period reflects the
need to predict variables which remain unpublished at the reporting date, and recognises that credit models utilise both level and annual
change in calculating ECL. The use of calendar years also maintains a comparability between tables disclosed.
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2021-2025
average
At 31 December 2021
%
%
%
%
%
%
Upside
Gross domestic product
7.1
4.0
1.4
1.3
1.4
3.0
UK Bank Rate
0.14
1.44
1.74
1.82
2.03
1.43
Unemployment rate
4.4
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.7
3.7
House price growth
10.1
2.6
4.9
4.7
3.6
5.1
Commercial real estate price growth
12.4
5.8
0.7
1.0
(0.6)
3.7
Base case
Gross domestic product
7.1
3.7
1.5
1.3
1.3
2.9
UK Bank Rate
0.14
0.81
1.00
1.06
1.25
0.85
Unemployment rate
4.5
4.3
4.4
4.4
4.5
4.4
House price growth
9.8
0.0
0.0
0.5
0.7
2.1
Commercial real estate price growth
10.2
(2.2)
(1.9)
0.1
0.6
1.2
Downside
Gross domestic product
7.1
3.4
1.3
1.1
1.2
2.8
UK Bank Rate
0.14
0.45
0.52
0.55
0.69
0.47
Unemployment rate
4.7
5.6
5.9
5.8
5.7
5.6
House price growth
9.2
(4.9)
(7.8)
(6.6)
(4.7)
(3.1)
Commercial real estate price growth
8.6
(10.1)
(7.0)
(3.4)
(0.3)
(2.6)
Severe downside
Gross domestic product
6.8
0.9
0.4
1.0
1.4
2.1
UK Bank Rate
0.14
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.09
0.08
Unemployment rate
4.9
7.7
8.5
8.1
7.6
7.3
House price growth
9.1
(7.3)
(13.9)
(12.5)
(8.4)
(6.9)
Commercial real estate price growth
5.8
(19.6)
(12.1)
(5.3)
(0.5)
(6.8)
Probability-weighted
Gross domestic product
7.0
3.4
1.3
1.2
1.3
2.8
UK Bank Rate
0.14
0.82
0.99
1.04
1.20
0.83
Unemployment rate
4.6
4.7
5.0
5.0
4.9
4.8
House price growth
9.6
(1.4)
(2.3)
(1.7)
(1.0)
0.6
Commercial real estate price growth
9.9
(3.9)
(3.7)
(1.2)
(0.1)
0.1
Base case scenario by quarter1
First
quarter
2021
Second
quarter
2021
Third
quarter
2021
Fourth
quarter
2021
First
quarter
2022
Second
quarter
2022
Third
quarter
2022
Fourth
quarter
2022
At 31 December 2021
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
Gross domestic product
(1.3)
5.4
1.1
0.4
0.1
1.5
0.5
0.3
UK Bank Rate
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.25
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.00
Unemployment rate
4.9
4.7
4.3
4.3
4.4
4.3
4.3
4.3
House price growth
6.5
8.7
7.4
9.8
8.4
6.1
3.2
(0.0)
Commercial real estate price growth
(2.9)
3.4
7.5
10.2
8.4
5.2
0.9
(2.2)
1Gross domestic product presented quarter-on-quarter, house price growth and commercial real estate growth presented year-on-year – i.e. from the equivalent quarter the previous year.
UK Bank Rate and unemployment rate are presented as at end of quarter.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 3: Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty (continued)
37
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2020-2024
average
At 31 December 2020
%
%
%
%
%
%
Upside
Gross domestic product
(10.5)
3.7
5.7
1.7
1.5
0.3
UK Bank Rate
0.10
1.14
1.27
1.20
1.21
0.98
Unemployment rate
4.3
5.4
5.4
5.0
4.5
5.0
House price growth
6.3
(1.4)
5.2
6.0
5.0
4.2
Commercial real estate price growth
(4.6)
9.3
3.9
2.1
0.3
2.1
Base case
Gross domestic product
(10.5)
3.0
6.0
1.7
1.4
0.1
UK Bank Rate
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.21
0.25
0.15
Unemployment rate
4.5
6.8
6.8
6.1
5.5
5.9
House price growth
5.9
(3.8)
0.5
1.5
1.5
1.1
Commercial real estate price growth
(7.0)
(1.7)
1.6
1.1
0.6
(1.1)
Downside
Gross domestic product
(10.6)
1.7
5.1
1.4
1.4
(0.4)
UK Bank Rate
0.10
0.06
0.02
0.02
0.03
0.05
Unemployment rate
4.6
7.9
8.4
7.8
7.0
7.1
House price growth
5.6
(8.4)
(6.5)
(4.7)
(3.0)
(3.5)
Commercial real estate price growth
(8.7)
(10.6)
(3.2)
(0.8)
(0.8)
(4.9)
Severe downside
Gross domestic product
(10.8)
0.3
4.8
1.3
1.2
(0.8)
UK Bank Rate
0.10
0.00
0.00
0.01
0.01
0.02
Unemployment rate
4.8
9.9
10.7
9.8
8.7
8.8
House price growth
5.3
(11.1)
(12.5)
(10.7)
(7.6)
(7.5)
Commercial real estate price growth
(11.0)
(21.4)
(9.8)
(3.9)
(0.8)
(9.7)
Probability-weighted
Gross domestic product
(10.6)
2.6
5.5
1.6
1.4
(0.1)
UK Bank Rate
0.10
0.39
0.42
0.43
0.45
0.36
Unemployment rate
4.5
7.0
7.3
6.7
6.0
6.3
House price growth
5.9
(5.2)
(1.5)
(0.2)
0.3
(0.2)
Commercial real estate price growth
(7.2)
(3.0)
(0.3)
0.3
(0.1)
(2.1)
Base case scenario by quarter1
First
quarter
2020
Second
quarter
2020
Third
quarter
2020
Fourth
quarter
2020
First
quarter
2021
Second
quarter
2021
Third
quarter
2021
Fourth
quarter
2021
At 31 December 2020
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
Gross domestic product
(3.0)
(18.8)
16.0
(1.9)
(3.8)
5.6
3.6
1.5
UK Bank Rate
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
Unemployment rate
4.0
4.1
4.8
5.0
5.2
6.5
8.0
7.5
House price growth
2.8
2.6
7.2
5.9
5.5
4.7
(1.6)
(3.8)
Commercial real estate price growth
(5.0)
(7.8)
(7.8)
(7.0)
(6.1)
(2.9)
(2.2)
(1.7)
1Gross domestic product presented quarter-on-quarter, house price growth and commercial real estate growth presented year-on-year – i.e. from the equivalent quarter the previous year.
UK Bank Rate and unemployment rate are presented as at end of quarter.
Economic assumptions – start to peak1
At 31 December 2021
At 31 December 2020
Upside
Base case
Downside
Severe
downside
Upside
Base case
Downside
Severe
downside
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
Gross domestic product
12.6
12.3
11.4
7.6
1.4
0.8
(1.7)
(3.0)
UK Bank Rate
2.04
1.25
0.71
0.25
1.44
0.25
0.10
0.10
Unemployment rate
4.9
4.9
6.0
8.5
6.5
8.0
9.3
11.5
House price growth
28.5
11.0
9.2
9.1
22.6
5.9
5.6
5.3
Commercial real estate price growth
20.9
10.2
8.6
6.9
11.0
(2.7)
(2.7)
(2.7)
1Reflects five year period from 2021 to 2025.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 3: Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty (continued)
38
Economic assumptions – start to trough1
At 31 December 2021
At 31 December 2020
Upside
Base case
Downside
Severe
downside
Upside
Base case
Downside
Severe
downside
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
Gross domestic product
(1.3)
(1.3)
(1.3)
(1.3)
(21.2)
(21.2)
(21.2)
(21.2)
UK Bank Rate
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.02
0.10
0.10
0.01
0.00
Unemployment rate
3.2
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
House price growth
1.2
1.2
(14.8)
(30.2)
(0.5)
(0.5)
(16.4)
(32.4)
Commercial real estate price growth
0.8
0.8
(12.8)
(30.0)
(6.9)
(9.0)
(22.2)
(39.9)
1Reflects five year period from 2021 to 2025.
ECL sensitivity to economic assumptions
The table below shows the Group’s ECL for the upside, base case, downside and severe downside scenarios. The stage allocation for an asset is
based on the overall scenario probability-weighted PD and, hence, the staging of assets is constant across all the scenarios. In each economic
scenario the ECL for individual assessments and post-model adjustments is constant reflecting the basis on which they are evaluated.
Judgements applied through changes to inputs are reflected in the scenario sensitivities. The probability-weighted view shows the extent to
which a higher ECL allowance has been recognised to take account of multiple economic scenarios relative to the base case; the uplift being
£128 million compared to £260 million at 31 December 2020, noting that if the impact of MES staging was also included, as shown in the table
below, this would increase to £132 million compared to £297 million at 31 December 2020.
At 31 December 2021
At 31 December 2020
Probability-
weighted
Upside
Base case
Downside
Severe
downside
Probability-
weighted
Upside
Base case
Downside
Severe
downside
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
ECL allowance
2,638
2,385
2,510
2,799
3,295
3,330
2,814
3,070
3,609
4,825
The table below shows the Group’s ECL for the upside, base case, downside and severe downside scenarios, with staging of assets based on
each specific scenario probability of default. ECL applied through individual assessments and post-model adjustments is reported flat against
each economic scenario, reflecting the basis on which they are evaluated. Judgements applied through changes to inputs are reflected in the
scenario sensitivities. A probability-weighted scenario is not shown as this does not reflect the basis on which ECL is reported.
At 31 December 2021
At 31 December 2020
Upside
Base case
Downside
Severe
downside
Upside
Base case
Downside
Severe
downside
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
ECL allowance
2,377
2,506
2,813
3,427
2,768
3,033
3,651
5,105
The impact of changes in the UK unemployment rate and House Price Index (HPI) have also been assessed. Although such changes would not
be observed in isolation, as economic indicators tend to be correlated in a coherent scenario, this gives insight into the sensitivity of the
Group’s ECL to gradual changes in these two critical economic factors. The assessment has been made against the base case with the reported
staging unchanged.
The table below shows the impact on the Group’s ECL resulting from a 1 percentage point (pp) increase or decrease in the UK unemployment
rate. The increase or decrease is presented based on the adjustment phased evenly over the first 10 quarters of the base case scenario. An
immediate increase or decrease would drive a more material ECL impact as it would be fully reflected in both 12-month and lifetime PDs.
At 31 December 2021
At 31 December 2020
1pp increase in
unemployment
1pp decrease in
unemployment
1pp increase in
unemployment
1pp decrease in
unemployment
ECL impact, £m
40
(35)
96
(89)
The table below shows the impact on the Group’s ECL in respect of UK mortgages of an increase or decrease in loss given default for a 10
percentage point (pp) increase or decrease in the UK House Price Index (HPI). The increase or decrease is presented based on the adjustment
phased evenly over the first 10 quarters of the base case scenario.
At 31 December 2021
At 31 December 2020
10pp increase
in HPI
10pp decrease
in HPI
10pp increase
in HPI
10pp decrease
in HPI
ECL impact, £m
(106)
154
(189)
259
Individual assessments
The Stage 3 ECL relating to commercial clients is largely assessed on an individual basis using bespoke assessment of loss for each specific
client. These assessments are carried out by the Business Support Unit based on detailed reviews and expected recovery strategies. While these
assessments are based on the Group’s latest economic view, the use of Group-wide multiple economic scenarios and weightings is not
considered appropriate for these cases due to their individual characteristics. In place of this, a range of case-specific outcomes are considered
with any alternative better or worse outcomes that carry a 25 per cent likelihood taken into account in establishing a probability-weighted ECL.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 3: Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty (continued)
39
Application of judgement in adjustments to modelled ECL
Impairment models fall within the Group’s model risk framework with model monitoring, periodic validation and back testing performed on
model components (i.e. probability of default, exposure at default and loss given default). Limitations in the Group’s impairment models or data
inputs may be identified through the ongoing assessment and validation of the output of the models. In these circumstances, management
make appropriate adjustments to the Group’s allowance for impairment losses to ensure that the overall provision adequately reflects all
material risks. These adjustments are determined by considering the particular attributes of exposures which have not been adequately
captured by the impairment models and range from changes to model inputs and parameters, at account level, through to more qualitative
post-model adjustments.
Judgements are not typically assessed under each distinct economic scenario used to generate ECL, but instead are applied on the basis of
final modelled ECL which reflects the probability-weighted view of all scenarios. All adjustments are reviewed quarterly and are subject to
internal review and challenge, including by the Lloyds Banking Group Audit Committee, to ensure that amounts are appropriately calculated
and that there are specific release criteria identified.
The coronavirus pandemic and the various support measures that have been put in place have resulted in an economic environment which
differs significantly from the historical economic conditions upon which the impairment models have been built. As a result there has been a
greater need for management judgements to be applied alongside the use of models. At 31 December 2021 management judgement resulted
in additional ECL allowances totalling £1,060 million (2020: £1,120 million). This comprises judgements added due to COVID-19 and other
judgements not directly linked to COVID-19 but which have increased in size during the pandemic. The table below analyses total ECL
allowance, separately identifying the amounts that have been modelled, those that have been individually assessed and those arising through
the application of management judgement.
Modelled
ECL
Individually
assessed
Judgements
due to
COVID-191
Other
judgements
Total ECL
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2021
869
709
390
670
2,638
At 31 December 2020
1,433
777
339
781
3,330
1Judgements introduced to address the impact that COVID-19 and resulting interventions have had on the Group’s economic outlook and observed loss experience, which have required
additional model limitations to be addressed.
Judgements due to COVID-19
These adjustments principally comprise:
Increase in time to repossession: £76 million (2020: £46 million)
This reflects an adjustment made to allow for an increase in the time assumed between default and repossession as a result of the Group
temporarily suspending the repossession of properties to support customers during the pandemic.
Recognition of impact of support measures: £56 million (2020: £63 million)
Government support and subdued levels of consumer spending are judged to have contributed to the reduced flow of accounts into default
and to improved average credit scores across portfolios. Management believes that the resulting position does not fully reflect the underlying
credit risk in the portfolios although there is no longer an expectation that the reduced level of defaults experienced in 2020 was temporary.
Adjustments continue to be made to increase expected future rates of default and predicted exposures at default relative to modelled ECL.
Adjustment to economic variables used as inputs to models: £10 million (2020: £14 million)
Observed reductions in the rate of UK corporate insolvencies, used as an input to commercial default models, continue to be substituted with
an increase proportionate to that seen in unemployment to generate a level of predicted defaults. As anticipated, the rate of recoveries has
returned to pre-pandemic levels towards the end of 2021 and, with model outputs based on 12 months observed insolvency data, management
believe the historically low levels of insolvencies seen during early 2021 do not reflect the underlying credit risk.
Specific sector risks: £10 million (2020: £nil)
At 31 December 2020 modelled ECL incorporated an economic outlook containing a material reduction in corporate profits. This is no longer
assumed, which generates a reduction in modelled ECL and therefore leaves potential risk on specific sectors. An updated assessment of risks
including COVID-driven restrictions, inflation and interest rate pressures has been undertaken which continues to suggest that a number of
specific industries remain more exposed. Judgement has therefore been raised in place of this to ensure a more targeted stress on likelihood
and severity of loss in sectors which are considered to face an elevated risk incorporating any impact on SICR through the increased likelihood
of loss.
COVID risk to base case conditioning assumptions: £240 million (2020: £200 million)
An important element of the methodology used to calculate the Group’s ECL allowance is the determination of a base case economic scenario,
predicated on certain conditioning assumptions, which is then used to derive alternative economic scenarios using stochastic shocks. While the
base case outlook has improved throughout the year, unexpected and adverse COVID-19 mutations may partially invalidate the base case
conditioning assumptions and therefore the potential range of losses considered. The base case represents the Groups most likely view,
however management believes that in the context of the pandemic, the possibility that the conditioning assumptions are invalidated is firmly to
the downside. In particular, the possibility that a future virus mutation has vaccine resistance leading to serious social and economic disruption.
Such a possibility lies outside of the Group’s current methodology because it would invalidate one of the key assumptions behind the base case
forecast. The likelihood and impact of a vaccine resistant mutation is difficult to estimate with any precision therefore the Group has considered
a number of approaches to create a reasonable estimate of this additional downside risk.
An adjustment of £240 million (31 December 2020: £200 million) has been made to increase the Group’s ECL allowances to reflect the increased
downside risk and the potential for the severity of losses to stretch beyond the Group’s severe scenario. One approach used to quantify this
amount is to apply a 15 per cent re-weighting from the stated upside to the stated severe downside scenario, a larger re-weight than at 31
December 2020 given that the current severe scenario reflects the improved conditioning assumptions of the base case, whereas the downside
risk remains constant. Another approach is to apply a 1 percentage point increase in unemployment allied with a 10 per cent lower HPI in 2022,
reflecting a broader assessment of a more immediate and therefore greater ECL impact than the gradual increase reflected in the stated
univariate sensitivities. Such an increase is proportionate to the level of volatility seen in forecasts every six months as the pandemic has
unfolded.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 3: Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty (continued)
40
As the adjustment has been calculated centrally it has not been allocated to specific portfolios, however the increase in 2021 reflects a more
granular assessment of the risk. It has therefore been allocated against Stage 1 assets given that the downside risks are largely considered to
relate to non-defaulted exposures, the majority of which are in Stage 1. Detailed level disclosures continue to reflect the Group’s economic
assumptions at the Group’s stated weightings.
Other judgements
These adjustments principally comprise:
Adjustment to modelled forecast parameters: £79 million (2020: £277 million)
Adjustments to the estimated defaults used within the ECL calculation for UK mortgages were introduced in 2020 following the adoption of new
default forecast models. Work has progressed through the year to embed the new model, including updates to model design choices through
the implementation of formal model changes or through in-model adjustments, which are considered judgemental pending final evaluation and
model governance. These remaining in-model adjustments now target a combination of specific enhancements which will continue to be
progressed through to model changes. The reduction in the adjustment is also partly due to the improved economic outlook which reduces the
impact of adopting the new forecast model.
End-of-term interest-only: £211 million (2020: £225 million)
The current definition of default used in the UK mortgages impairment model excludes past term interest-only accounts that continue to make
interest payments but have missed their capital payment upon maturity of the loan. This adjustment therefore mitigates the risk that the model
understates the credit losses associated with interest-only accounts which have missed, or will potentially miss, their final capital payment. For
those accounts that have reached end of term this adjustment manually overwrites PDs to 70 per cent or 100 per cent, thereby moving them
into Stage 2, or Stage 3, depending on whether they are considered performing or non-performing respectively. For interest-only accounts with
six years or less to maturity an appropriate incremental PD uplift is made to PDs based on the probability of missing a future capital payment,
assessed through segmentation of behaviour score, debt-to-value and worst ever arrears status.
Long-term defaults: £144 million (2020: £145 million)
The Group suspended mortgage litigation activity between late 2014 and mid 2018 as changes were implemented to the treatment of amounts
in arrears, interrupting the natural flow of accounts to possession. An adjustment is made to ensure adequate provision coverage considering
the resulting build-up of accounts in long-term default. Coverage is uplifted to the equivalent levels of those accounts already in repossession
on an estimated shortfall of balances expected to flow to possession. A further adjustment is made to mitigate for the risk that credit model
provision understates the probability of possession for accounts which have been in default for more than 24 months, with an arrears balance
increase in the last 6 months. These accounts have their probability of possession set to 95 per cent based on observed historical losses incurred
on accounts that were of an equivalent status.
Adjustment for specific segments: £78 million (2020: £46 million)
The Group monitors risks across specific UK mortgage segments of its portfolios which may not be fully captured through wider collective
models. Along with continued judgemental increases to probability of default on forborne accounts of £36 million (2020: £46 million), the Group
has taken an additional £42 million judgement for fire safety and cladding uncertainty. This captures risks within the assessment of affordability
and asset valuations, not captured by underlying models. Though experience remains limited the risk is now considered sufficiently material to
address through judgement, given that more cases have been assessed as having defective cladding, or other fire safety issues, together with
emerging evidence of higher arrears and weaker sales values relative to the wider portfolio.
Inflation and interest rate risk: £57 million (2020: £nil)
The Group’s approach to MES modelling incorporates a range of interest rate scenarios, however it is recognised that given current inflationary
pressures the risk of a very rapid increase in interest rates may not be fully captured in the range of economic assumptions used to assess credit
losses. Therefore an additional management judgement for the mortgage portfolio, for which default rates are most sensitive to interest rates,
has been taken to reflect this heightened risk. The quantification of this risk adopts an alternative severe downside scenario which leverages the
Group’s internal stress testing exercise. The increase in ECL therefore reflects the incremental losses from adopting a severe downside scenario
with interest rates increasing to 4 per cent, with peak unemployment and house price falls broadly consistent with the Group’s stated severe
downside scenario. The Group will continue to reassess inflationary risks and whether this additional judgement is required.
Lifetime extension on revolving products: £16 million (2020: £28 million)
Unsecured revolving products use a model lifetime definition of three years based on historic data which shows that substantially all accounts
resolve in this time. An adjustment is made to extend the lifetime used for Stage 2 exposures to six years by increasing default probabilities
through the extrapolation of the default trajectory observed throughout the three years and beyond. The resulting additional ECL allowance is
added to Stage 2 accounts proportionate to the modelled three-year PD. The decrease in this judgement during 2021 is primarily due to the
Group's improved economic outlook, meaning that the model view of lifetime three year losses is lower and therefore this extrapolation to six
years is proportionally lower.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 3: Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty (continued)
41
Defined benefit pension scheme obligations
Key judgement:
Determination of an appropriate yield curve
Key estimates:
Discount rate applied to future cash flows
Expected lifetime of the schemes' members
Expected rate of future inflationary increases
The net asset recognised in the balance sheet at 31 December 2021 in respect of the Group’s defined benefit pension scheme obligations was
£1,658 million comprising an asset of £1,749 million and a liability of £91 million (2020: a net asset of £576 million comprising an asset of
£674 million and a liability of £98 million). The Group’s accounting policy for its defined benefit pension scheme obligations is set out in note
2(K).
The accounting valuation of the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes’ liabilities requires management to make a number of assumptions.
The key areas of estimation uncertainty are the discount rate applied to future cash flows, the expected lifetime of the schemes’ members and
the expected rate of future inflationary increases.
The discount rate is required to be set with reference to market yields at the end of the reporting period on high quality corporate bonds in the
currency of and with a term consistent with the defined benefit pension schemes’ obligations. The average duration of the schemes’ obligations
is approximately 19 years. The market for bonds with a similar duration is limited and, as a result, significant management judgement is required
to determine an appropriate yield curve on which to base the discount rate. Assuming that there is no change in other assumptions or in the
value of the schemes' assets, the effect on the net accounting surplus at 31 December 2021 of a decrease of 10 basis points in the discount rate
would be a reduction of £303 million (2020: £342 million). To the extent that changes in the discount rate arise from changes in gilt yields, rather
than credit spreads, the impact is largely mitigated by the schemes' asset-liability matching strategies.
The cost of the benefits payable by the schemes will also depend upon the life expectancy of the members. The mortality assumptions used by
the Group are based on standard industry tables for both current mortality rates and the rate of future mortality improvement, adjusted in line
with the actual experience of the Group's schemes. Assuming that there is no change in other assumptions or in the value of the schemes'
assets, the effect on the net accounting surplus at 31 December 2021 of an increase of one year in the average life of scheme members would
be a reduction of £680 million (2020: £776 million). The Group has in place a longevity swap, as described in note 22, to partially mitigate
mortality risk.
The majority of the Group’s plans provide benefits linked to inflation both in deferment and in payment and the Group sets its inflation
assumption with reference to an implied inflation curve. Assuming that there is no change in other assumptions or in the value of the schemes’
assets, the effect on the net accounting surplus at 31 December 2021 of an increase of 10 basis points in the expected rate of inflation would be
a decrease of £172 million (2020: £194 million). This impact would be offset by gains recognised on the pension schemes’ holding of index
linked gilts and inflation linked swaps.
Further sensitivities and the balance sheet impact of changes in the principal actuarial assumptions are provided in part (v) of note 22.
Uncertain tax positions
Key judgement:
Interpreting tax rules on the Group’s open tax matters
The Lloyds Banking Group has an open matter in relation to a claim for group relief of losses incurred in its former Irish banking subsidiary,
which ceased trading on 31 December 2010. In 2013, HMRC informed the Lloyds Banking Group that its interpretation of the UK rules means
that the group relief is not available. In 2020, HMRC concluded their enquiry into the matter and issued a closure notice. The Lloyds Banking
Group's interpretation of the UK rules has not changed and hence it has appealed to the First Tier Tax Tribunal, with a hearing expected in
2022. If the final determination of the matter by the judicial process is that HMRC’s position is correct, management estimate that this would
result in an increase in current tax liabilities of the Group of approximately £380 million (including interest). The Lloyds Banking Group, having
taken appropriate advice, does not consider that this is a case where additional tax will ultimately fall due.
The Group makes other estimates in relation to tax which do not require significant judgements, see further discussion in note 23.
Regulatory and legal provisions
Key judgements:
Determining the scope of reviews required by regulators
The impact of legal decisions that may be relevant to claims received
Determining whether a reliable estimate is available for obligations arising from past events
Key estimates:
The number of future complaints
The proportion of complaints that will be upheld
The average cost of redress
At 31 December 2021, the Group carried provisions of £835 million (2020: £230 million) against the cost of making redress payments to
customers and the related administration costs in connection with historical regulatory breaches.
Determining the amount of the provisions, which represent management’s best estimate of the cost of settling these issues, requires the
exercise of significant judgement and estimation. It will often be necessary to form a view on matters which are inherently uncertain, such as the
scope of reviews required by regulators, and to estimate the number of future complaints, the extent to which they will be upheld, the average
cost of redress and the impact of decisions reached by legal and other review processes that may be relevant to claims received. Consequently
the continued appropriateness of the underlying assumptions is reviewed on a regular basis against actual experience and other relevant
evidence and adjustments made to the provisions where appropriate.
Management has applied significant judgement in determining the provision required for HBOS Reading; further details are provided in note
24.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 3: Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty (continued)
42
Fair value of financial instruments
Key estimate:
Interest rate spreads, earnings multiples and interest rate volatility
At 31 December 2021, the carrying value of the Group’s financial instrument assets held at fair value was £6,725 million (2020: £10,312 million),
and its financial instrument liabilities held at fair value was £4,190 million (2020: £8,497 million).
The Group’s valuation control framework and a description of level 1, 2 and 3 financial assets and liabilities is set out in note 33(2). The valuation
techniques for level 3 financial instruments involve management judgement and estimates, the extent of which depends on the complexity of
the instrument and the availability of market observable information. In addition, in line with market practice, the Group applies credit, debit
and funding valuation adjustments in determining the fair value of its uncollateralised derivative positions. A description of these adjustments is
set out in note 33.
Note 4: Net interest income
Weighted average
effective interest rate
2021
2020
2021
2020
%
%
£m
£m
Interest income:
Financial assets held at amortised cost
2.43
2.17
7,146
7,477
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
0.91
1.00
21
28
Total interest income1
2.42
2.16
7,167
7,505
Interest expense:
Deposits from banks, customer deposits repurchase agreements and other liabilities
0.71
0.72
(1,631)
(2,081)
Debt securities in issue2
0.44
(0.48)
(30)
44
Lease liabilities
2.29
2.19
(15)
(16)
Subordinated liabilities
4.04
5.13
(105)
(181)
Total interest expense
0.74
0.74
(1,781)
(2,234)
Net interest income
5,386
5,271
1Includes £12 million (2020: £8 million) in respect of interest income on finance leases.
2The impact of the Group’s hedging arrangements is included on this line; excluding this impact the weighted average effective interest rate in respect of debt securities in issue would be
2.69 per cent (2020: 2.58 per cent).
Included within interest income is £119 million (2020: £105 million) in respect of credit-impaired financial assets. Net interest income also
includes a debit of £19 million (2020: credit of £4 million) transferred from the cash flow hedging reserve (see note 27).
Note 5: Net fee and commission income
2021
2020
£m
£m
Fee and commission income:
Current accounts
196
203
Credit and debit card fees
245
206
Other
122
90
Total fee and commission income
563
499
Fee and commission expense
(282)
(274)
Net fee and commission income
281
225
Fees and commissions which are an integral part of the effective interest rate form part of net interest income shown in note 4. Fees and
commissions relating to instruments that are held at fair value through profit or loss are included within net trading income shown in note 6.
In determining the disaggregation of fees and commissions the Group has considered how the nature, amount, timing and uncertainty of
revenue and cash flows are affected by economic factors, including those that are impacted by climate-related factors. It has determined that
the above disaggregation by product type provides useful information that does not aggregate items that have substantially different
characteristics and is not too detailed.
At 31 December 2021, the Group held on its balance sheet £22 million (31 December 2020: £22 million) in respect of services provided to
customers. There were no unsatisfied performance obligations at 31 December 2020 or 31 December 2021.
The most significant performance obligations undertaken by the Group are in respect of current accounts, the provision of other banking
services for commercial customers and credit and debit card services.
In respect of current accounts, the Group receives fees for the provision of bank account and transaction services such as ATM services, fund
transfers, overdraft facilities and other value-added offerings.
For commercial customers, alongside its provision of current accounts, the Group provides other corporate banking services including factoring
and commitments to provide loan financing. Loan commitment fees are included in fees and commissions where the loan is not expected to be
drawn down by the customer.
The Group receives interchange and merchant fees, together with fees for overseas use and cash advances, for provision of card services to
cardholders and merchants.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 3: Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty (continued)
43
2021
2020
£m
£m
Foreign exchange
16
41
Investment property losses
(20)
Hedging and other gains (losses)
40
(342)
Net trading income (losses)
56
(321)
Note 7: Other operating income
2021
2020
£m
£m
Gains less losses on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (note 27)
7
Liability management
7
221
Intercompany recharges and other
17
105
Total other operating income
24
333
Note 8: Operating expenses
2021
2020
£m
£m
Staff costs:
Salaries
849
891
Social security costs
94
81
Pensions and other post-retirement benefit schemes (note 22)
206
209
1,149
1,181
Premises and equipment:
Rent and rates
57
63
Repairs and maintenance
44
37
Other
40
83
141
183
Other expenses:
Communications and data processing
95
119
Advertising and promotion
44
54
Professional fees
15
10
Regulatory and legal provisions (note 24)
982
107
Amounts payable to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings and other
1,140
787
2,276
1,077
Depreciation and amortisation:
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment1
187
199
Amortisation of other intangible assets
97
33
284
232
Total operating expenses
3,850
2,673
1Comprising depreciation in respect of premises £49 million (2020: £54 million), equipment £53 million (2020: £53 million) and right-of-use assets £85 million (2020: £92 million).
The average number of persons on a headcount basis employed by the Group during the year was as follows:
2021
2020
UK
25,123
26,869
Overseas
410
389
Total
25,533
27,258
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 6: Net trading income
44
Fees payable to the Company's auditors1 are as follows:
2021
2020
£m
£m
Fees payable for the:
– the audit of the Company's current year Annual Report
1.8
1.7
– the audits of the Company’s subsidiaries
5.4
5.1
– total audit fees in respect of the statutory audit of Group entities2
7.2
6.8
– services normally provided in connection with statutory and regulatory filings or engagements
0.4
0.8
Total audit fees3
7.6
7.6
Other audit-related fees3
All other fees3
0.2
Total non-audit services4
0.2
Total fees payable to the Company’s auditors by the Group
7.8
7.6
1Deloitte LLP became the Group's statutory auditor in 2021. PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP was the statutory auditor during 2020.
2As defined by the Financial Reporting Council (FRC).
3As defined by the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC).
4As defined by the SEC. Total non-audit services as defined by the FRC include all fees other than audit fees in respect of the statutory audit of Group entities. These fees totalled £0.6 million
(2020 £0.8 million).
The following types of services are included in the categories listed above:
Audit fees: This category includes fees in respect of the audit of the Group’s annual financial statements and other services in connection with
regulatory filings. Other services supplied pursuant to legislation relate primarily to costs incurred in connection with client asset assurance and
with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act requirements associated with the audit of Lloyds Banking Group's financial statements filed on its Form 20-F.
Other audit-related fees: This category includes fees in respect of services for assurance and related services that are reasonably related to the
performance of the audit or review of the financial statements, for example acting as reporting accountants in respect of debt prospectuses
required by the Listing Rules.
All other fees: This category includes other assurance services not related to the performance of the audit or review of the financial statements,
for example, the review of controls operated by the Group on behalf of a third party. The auditors are not engaged to provide tax services.
It is the Group’s policy to use the auditors only on assignments in cases where their knowledge of the Group means that it is neither efficient nor
cost effective to employ another firm of accountants.
The Group has procedures that are designed to ensure auditor independence, including prohibiting certain non-audit services. All audit and
non-audit assignments must be pre-approved by the Lloyds Banking Group Audit Committee on an individual engagement basis; for certain
types of non-audit engagements where the fee is ‘de minimis’ the Lloyds Banking Group Audit Committee has pre-approved all assignments
subject to confirmation by management. On a quarterly basis, the Lloyds Banking Group Audit Committee receives and reviews a report
detailing all pre-approved services and amounts paid to the auditors for such pre-approved services.
During the year the auditors also earned £0.1 million (2020: £0.1 million) payable by entities outside the consolidated HBOS Group in respect of
audits of the Group pension schemes.
Note 10: Impairment
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
Year ended 31 December 2021
Impact of transfers between stages
25
(128)
142
39
Other changes in credit quality
(107)
(124)
69
(162)
Additions and repayments
(41)
(125)
(88)
(254)
Other items
2
1
3
(146)
(248)
(19)
(413)
Total impairment (credit) charge
(121)
(376)
123
(374)
In respect of:
Loans and advances to customers
(94)
(336)
128
(302)
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
Financial assets at amortised cost
(94)
(336)
128
(302)
Loan commitments and financial guarantees
(27)
(40)
(5)
(72)
Total impairment (credit) charge
(121)
(376)
123
(374)
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 9: Auditors’ remuneration
45
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
Year ended 31 December 2020
Impact of transfers between stages
(49)
348
267
566
Other changes in credit quality
386
103
595
1,084
Additions and repayments
31
(14)
(41)
(24)
Other items
(5)
(5)
417
89
549
1,055
Total impairment charge
368
437
816
1,621
In respect of:
Loans and advances to customers
338
396
812
1,546
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
1
1
Financial assets at amortised cost
339
396
812
1,547
Loan commitments and financial guarantees
29
41
4
74
Total impairment charge
368
437
816
1,621
The Group’s impairment charge comprises the following items:
Impact of transfers between stages
The net impact on the impairment charge of transfers between stages.
Other changes in credit quality
Changes in loss allowance as a result of movements in risk parameters that reflect changes in customer quality, but which have not resulted in a
transfer to a different stage. This also contains the impact on the impairment charge as a result of write-offs and recoveries, where the related
loss allowances are reassessed to reflect ultimate realisable or recoverable value.
Additions and repayments
Expected loss allowances are recognised on origination of new loans or further drawdowns of existing facilities. Repayments relate to the
reduction of loss allowances resulting from the repayments of outstanding balances that have been provided against.
Movements in the Group's impairment allowances are shown in note 13.
Note 11: Tax expense
(A)Analysis of tax expense for the year
2021
2020
£m
£m
UK corporation tax:
Current tax on profit for the year
(576)
(62)
Adjustments in respect of prior years
17
51
(559)
(11)
Foreign tax:
Current tax on profit for the year
12
Adjustments in respect of prior years
8
2
8
14
Current tax (expense) credit
(551)
3
Deferred tax:
Current year
168
(2)
Adjustments in respect of prior years
(44)
(30)
Deferred tax credit (expense)
124
(32)
Tax expense
(427)
(29)
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 10: Impairment (continued)
46
(B)Factors affecting tax expense for the year
The UK corporation tax rate for the year was 19.0 per cent (2020: 19.0 per cent). An explanation of the relationship between tax expense and
accounting profit is set out below:
2021
2020
£m
£m
Profit before tax
2,271
1,214
UK corporation tax thereon
(431)
(231)
Impact of surcharge on banking profits
(239)
(59)
Non-deductible costs: conduct charges
(155)
13
Non-deductible costs: bank levy
(8)
(11)
Other non-deductible costs
(21)
(19)
Non-taxable income
5
39
Tax relief on coupons on other equity instruments
21
31
Remeasurement of deferred tax due to rate changes
420
182
Differences in overseas tax rates
3
Adjustments in respect of prior years
(19)
23
Tax expense
(427)
(29)
The tax expense in 2021 included the impact of non-deductible conduct charges which were significantly greater than in 2020, reflecting the
Group's best estimate of tax-deductibility of provisions made in the year.
Note 12: Derivative financial instruments
The fair values and notional amounts of derivative instruments are set out in the following table:
2021
2020
Contract/
notional
amount
Fair value
assets
Fair value
liabilities
Contract/
notional
amount
Fair value
assets
Fair value
liabilities
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Trading and other
Exchange rate contracts:
Spot, forwards and futures
273
3
5
795
14
49
Currency swaps
10,044
85
326
32,733
630
697
Options purchased
5
2
Options written
5
2
10,327
88
331
33,532
644
746
Interest rate contracts:
Interest rate swaps
64,661
3,794
3,587
91,531
5,223
6,429
Forward rate agreements
2,940
Options purchased
100
1
135
12
Options written
119
1
250
1
64,880
3,795
3,588
94,856
5,235
6,430
Credit derivatives
2,017
10
24
2,132
15
21
Equity and other contracts
44
11
166
47
257
Total derivative assets/liabilities - trading and other
77,268
3,904
4,109
130,567
5,894
7,454
Hedging
Derivatives designated as fair value hedges:
Interest rate swaps
2,823
280
48
4,938
664
106
Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges:
Interest rate swaps
9,993
752
892
Total derivative assets/liabilities - hedging
2,823
280
48
14,931
1,416
998
Total recognised derivative assets/liabilities
80,091
4,184
4,157
145,498
7,310
8,452
The notional amount of the contract does not represent the Group’s exposure to credit risk, which is limited to the current cost of replacing
contracts with a positive value to the Group should the counterparty default. To reduce credit risk the Group uses a variety of credit
enhancement techniques such as netting and collateralisation, where security is provided against the exposure; a large proportion of the
Group's derivatives are held through exchanges such as London Clearing House and are collateralised through those exchanges. Further details
are provided in note 36 Credit risk.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 11: Tax expense
47
The Group holds derivatives as part of the following strategies:
Customer driven, where derivatives are held as part of the provision of risk management products to Group customers
To manage and hedge the Group’s interest rate and foreign exchange risk arising from normal banking business. The hedge accounting
strategy adopted by the Group is to utilise a combination of fair value and cash flow hedge approaches as described in note 36
The principal derivatives used by the Group are as follows:
Interest rate related contracts include interest rate swaps, forward rate agreements and options. An interest rate swap is an agreement
between two parties to exchange fixed and floating interest payments, based upon interest rates defined in the contract, without the
exchange of the underlying principal amounts. Forward rate agreements are contracts for the payment of the difference between a
specified rate of interest and a reference rate, applied to a notional principal amount at a specific date in the future. An interest rate option
gives the buyer, on payment of a premium, the right, but not the obligation, to fix the rate of interest on a future loan or deposit, for a
specified period and commencing on a specified future date
Exchange rate related contracts include forward foreign exchange contracts, currency swaps and options. A forward foreign exchange
contract is an agreement to buy or sell a specified amount of foreign currency on a specified future date at an agreed rate. Currency swaps
generally involve the exchange of interest payment obligations denominated in different currencies; the exchange of principal can be
notional or actual. A currency option gives the buyer, on payment of a premium, the right, but not the obligation, to sell specified amounts
of currency at agreed rates of exchange on or before a specified future date
Credit derivatives, principally credit default swaps, are used by the Group as part of its trading activity and to manage its own exposure to
credit risk. A credit default swap is a swap in which one counterparty receives a premium at pre-set intervals in consideration for
guaranteeing to make a specific payment should a negative credit event take place
Equity derivatives are also used by the Group as part of its equity-based retail product activity to eliminate the Group’s exposure to
fluctuations in various international stock exchange indices. Index-linked equity options are purchased which give the Group the right, but
not the obligation, to buy or sell a specified amount of equities, or basket of equities, in the form of published indices on or before a
specified future date
Details of the Group’s hedging instruments are set out below:
Maturity
The Group
At 31 December 2021
Up to 1 month
1-3 months
3-12 months
1-5 years
Over 5 years
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Interest rate swap
Notional
85
28
1,095
1,309
306
2,823
Average fixed interest rate
4.25%
4.38%
4.69%
4.94%
5.67%
Cash flow hedges
Interest rate
Interest rate swap
Notional
Average fixed interest rate
At 31 December 2020
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Interest rate swap
Notional
27
1,704
2,421
786
4,938
Average fixed interest rate
5.06%
4.63%
4.72%
5.58%
Cash flow hedges
Interest rate
.
Interest rate swap
Notional
49
637
1,084
4,918
3,305
9,993
Average fixed interest rate
4.07%
2.19%
0.82%
1.67%
3.65%
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 12: Derivative financial instruments (continued)
48
The carrying amounts of the Group’s hedging instruments are as follows:
Carrying amount of the hedging instrument
The Group
At 31 December 2021
Contract/
notional
amount
Assets
Liabilities
Changes in fair
value used for
calculating hedge
ineffectiveness
£m
£m
£m
£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Interest rate swaps
2,823
280
48
(190)
Cash flow hedges
Interest rate
Interest rate swaps
(43)
At 31 December 2020
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Interest rate swaps
4,938
664
106
(42)
Cash flow hedges
Interest rate
Interest rate swaps
9,993
752
892
(2)
All amounts are held within derivative financial instruments.
The Group’s hedged items are as follows:
Carrying amount of
the hedged item
Accumulated amount of
fair value adjustment on
the hedged item
Change in
fair value of
hedged item for
ineffectiveness
assessment
Cash flow hedging reserve
Continuing
hedges
Discontinued
hedges
The Group
At 31 December 2021
Assets
Liabilities
Assets
Liabilities
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Fixed rate issuance1
2,570
212
215
Fixed rate bonds2
660
(2)
(22)
Cash flow hedges
Interest rate
Customer loans3
53
(113)
Customer deposits4
(11)
23
At 31 December 2020
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Fixed rate issuance1
4,731
468
27
Fixed rate bonds2
872
20
15
Cash flow hedges
Interest rate
Customer loans3
2
48
(117)
Customer deposits4
(5)
13
1Included within debt securities in issue.
2Included within financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income.
3Included within loans and advances to customers.
4Included within customer deposits.
The accumulated amount of fair value hedge adjustments remaining in the balance sheet for hedged items that have ceased to be adjusted for
hedging gains and losses is a liability of £39 million (2020: liability of £80 million).
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 12: Derivative financial instruments (continued)
49
Gains and losses arising from hedge accounting are summarised as follows:
Gain (loss)
recognised
in other
comprehensive
income1
Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement2
Amounts reclassified from reserves
to income statement as:
The Group
At 31 December 2021
Hedged item
affected income
statement
Income
statement line
item that includes
reclassified amount
£m
£m
£m
Cash flow hedges
Interest rate
Customer loans
(44)
(4)
24
Interest income
Customer deposits
15
1
(5)
Interest expense
At 31 December 2020
Cash flow hedges
Interest rate
Customer loans
(8)
(5)
Interest income
Customer deposits
1
1
Interest expense
1Comprising the change in fair value of the hedging derivatives (a loss of £48 million; 2020: loss of £3 million) and the amounts reclassified from reserves to the income statement (positive
£19 million; 2020: negative £4 million).
2Hedge ineffectiveness is included in the income statement within net trading income.
There were no amounts reclassified from the cash flow hedging reserve in 2020 or 2021 for which hedge accounting had previously been used
but for which the hedged future cash flows are no longer expected to occur.
At 31 December 2021 £4,076 million of total recognised derivative assets of the Group and £4,022 million of total recognised derivative liabilities
of the Group (2020: £7,027 million of assets and £8,121 million of liabilities) had a contractual residual maturity of greater than one year.
2021
2020
Contract/
notional
amount
Fair value
assets
Fair value
liabilities
Contract/
notional
amount
Fair value
assets
Fair value
liabilities
The Company
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Trading and other
Interest rate contracts:
Interest rate swaps
489
82
80
489
113
109
Hedging
Derivatives designated as fair value hedges:
Interest rate swaps
523
81
703
105
Total recognised derivative assets/liabilities
1,012
163
80
1,192
218
109
Details of the Company’s hedging instruments are set out below:
Maturity
The Company
At 31 December 2021
Up to 1 month
1-3 months
3-12 months
1-5 years
Over 5 years
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Interest rate swap
Notional
518
5
523
Average fixed interest rate
5.23%
7.88%
At 31 December 2020
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Interest rate swap
Notional
144
554
5
703
Average fixed interest rate
5.37%
5.23%
7.88%
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 12: Derivative financial instruments (continued)
50
The carrying amounts of the Company’s hedging instruments are as follows:
Carrying amount of the hedging instrument
The Company
At 31 December 2021
Contract/
notional
amount
Assets
Liabilities
Changes in fair
value used for
calculating hedge
ineffectiveness
£m
£m
£m
£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Interest rate swaps
523
81
(38)
At 31 December 2020
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Interest rate swaps
703
105
(19)
All amounts are held within derivative financial instruments.
The Company’s hedged items are as follows:
Carrying amount of
the hedged item
Accumulated amount of
fair value adjustment on
the hedged item
Change in
fair value of
hedged item for
ineffectiveness
assessment
The Company
At 31 December 2021
Assets
Liabilities
Assets
Liabilities
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Fixed rate issuance1
531
38
41
At 31 December 2020
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Fixed rate issuance1
1,093
182
19
1Included within debt securities in issue.
The accumulated amount of fair value hedge adjustments remaining in the balance sheet for hedged items that have ceased to be adjusted for
hedging gains and losses is an liability of £3 million (2020: liability of £113 million).
Gains and losses arising from hedge accounting are summarised as follows:
Hedge ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement1
2021
2020
The Company
£m
£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Fixed rate issuance
3
1Hedge ineffectiveness is included in the income statement within net trading income.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 12: Derivative financial instruments (continued)
51
There were no amounts reclassified from the cash flow hedging reserve in 2020 or 2021 for which hedge accounting had previously been used
but for which the hedged future cash flows are no longer expected to occur.
At 31 December 2021 £163 million of total recognised derivative assets of the Company and £80 million of total recognised derivative liabilities
of the Company (2020: £218 million of assets and £109 million of liabilities) had a contractual residual maturity of greater than one year.
Note 13: Financial assets at amortised cost
Year ended 31 December 2021
Gross carrying amount
Allowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Loans and advances to banks
At 31 December 2021
102
102
Allowance for impairment losses
Net carrying amount
102
102
Loans and advances to customers
At 1 January 2021
226,746
34,437
5,775
266,958
486
1,146
1,560
3,192
Exchange and other adjustments
(32)
(31)
(63)
9
9
Transfers to Stage 1
9,790
(9,779)
(11)
210
(206)
(4)
Transfers to Stage 2
(6,399)
7,171
(772)
(19)
108
(89)
Transfers to Stage 3
(309)
(1,356)
1,665
(6)
(118)
124
Impact of transfers between stages
3,082
(3,964)
882
(160)
100
110
50
25
(116)
141
50
Other changes in credit quality
(83)
(107)
75
(115)
Additions and repayments
20,211
(4,053)
(745)
15,413
(36)
(113)
(88)
(237)
(Credit) charge to the income statement
(94)
(336)
128
(302)
Advances written off
(382)
(382)
(382)
(382)
Recoveries of advances written off in
previous years
62
62
62
62
At 31 December 2021
250,007
26,420
5,561
281,988
392
810
1,377
2,579
Allowance for impairment losses
(392)
(810)
(1,377)
(2,579)
Net carrying amount
249,615
25,610
4,184
279,409
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
At 31 December 2021
15,183
15,183
2
2
Allowance for impairment losses
(2)
(2)
Net carrying amount
15,181
15,181
Total financial assets at amortised cost
264,898
25,610
4,184
294,692
Movements in allowance for expected credit losses in respect of undrawn balances were as follows:
Allowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
Undrawn balances
At 1 January 2021
54
69
6
129
Exchange and other adjustments
(1)
(1)
Transfers to Stage 1
20
(20)
Transfers to Stage 2
(3)
3
Transfers to Stage 3
(2)
2
Impact of transfers between stages
(17)
7
(1)
(11)
(12)
1
(11)
Other items credited to the income statement
(27)
(28)
(6)
(61)
Credit to the income statement
(27)
(40)
(5)
(72)
At 31 December 2021
26
29
1
56
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 12: Derivative financial instruments (continued)
52
The Group's total impairment allowances were as follows:
Allowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
In respect of:
Loans and advances to customers
392
810
1,377
2,579
Other assets
1
1
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
2
2
Drawn balances
394
810
1,378
2,582
Provisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guarantees
26
29
1
56
Total
420
839
1,379
2,638
Year ended 31 December 2020
Gross carrying amount
Allowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Loans and advances to banks
At 31 December 2020
225
225
Allowance for impairment losses
Net carrying amount
225
225
Loans and advances to customers
At 1 January 2020
229,740
24,996
5,663
260,399
148
749
1,187
2,084
Exchange and other adjustments
95
1
(2)
94
1
15
16
Transfers to Stage 1
3,011
(3,004)
(7)
52
(51)
(1)
Transfers to Stage 2
(15,009)
15,731
(722)
(63)
120
(57)
Transfers to Stage 3
(401)
(1,598)
1,999
(6)
(108)
114
Impact of transfers between stages
(12,399)
11,129
1,270
(33)
372
197
536
(50)
333
253
536
Other changes in credit quality
366
88
587
1,041
Additions and repayments
10,106
(1,665)
(702)
7,739
22
(25)
(28)
(31)
Charge to the income statement
338
396
812
1,546
Disposal of business
(796)
(24)
(820)
Advances written off
(552)
(552)
(552)
(552)
Recoveries of advances written off in
previous years
98
98
98
98
At 31 December 2020
226,746
34,437
5,775
266,958
486
1,146
1,560
3,192
Allowance for impairment losses
(486)
(1,146)
(1,560)
(3,192)
Net carrying amount
226,260
33,291
4,215
263,766
Gross carrying amount
Allowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
At 31 December 2020
19,860
19,860
8
8
Allowance for impairment losses
(8)
(8)
Net carrying amount
19,852
19,852
Total financial assets at amortised cost
246,337
33,291
4,215
283,843
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 13: Financial assets at amortised cost (continued)
53
Movements in allowance for expected credit losses in respect of undrawn balances were as follows:
Allowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
Undrawn balances
At 1 January 2020
26
28
1
55
Exchange and other adjustments
(1)
1
Transfers to Stage 1
8
(8)
Transfers to Stage 2
(3)
3
Transfers to Stage 3
(3)
3
Impact of transfers between stages
(4)
23
11
30
1
15
14
30
Other items charged (credited) to the income statement
28
26
(10)
44
Charge to the income statement
29
41
4
74
At 31 December 2020
54
69
6
129
The Group's total impairment allowances were as follows:
Allowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
In respect of:
Loans and advances to customers
486
1,146
1,560
3,192
Other assets
1
1
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
8
8
Drawn balances
494
1,146
1,561
3,201
Provisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guarantees
54
69
6
129
Total
548
1,215
1,567
3,330
The movement tables are compiled by comparing the position at 31 December to that at the beginning of the year. Transfers between stages
are deemed to have taken place at the start of the reporting period, with all other movements shown in the stage in which the asset is held at 31
December.
Additions and repayments comprise new loans originated and repayments of outstanding balances throughout the reporting period. Loans
which are written off in the period are first transferred to Stage 3 before acquiring a full allowance and subsequent write-off.
At 31 December 2021 £44 million (2020: £58 million) of loans and advances to banks of the Group had a contractual residual maturity of greater
than one year.
At 31 December 2021 £262,405 million (2020: £248,314 million) of loans and advances to customers of the Group had a contractual residual
maturity of greater than one year.
At 31 December 2021 the Company had financial assets at amortised cost of £2,655 million (2020: £7,245 million), representing amounts due
from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings, all of which was Stage 1.
Note 14: Finance lease receivables
The Group’s finance lease receivables are classified as loans and advances to customers and accounted for at amortised cost. The balance is
analysed as follows:
The Group
2021
2020
£m
£m
Not later than 1 year
31
31
Later than 1 year and not later than 2 years
41
32
Later than 2 years and not later than 3 years
30
50
Later than 3 years and not later than 4 years
27
26
Later than 4 years and not later than 5 years
27
30
Later than 5 years
149
172
Gross investment in finance leases
305
341
Unearned future finance income on finance leases
(92)
(105)
Rentals received in advance
(1)
Net investment in finance leases
213
235
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 13: Financial assets at amortised cost (continued)
54
The net investment in finance leases represents amounts recoverable as follows:
The Group
2021
2020
£m
£m
Not later than 1 year
10
10
Later than 1 year and not later than 2 years
27
17
Later than 2 years and not later than 3 years
18
37
Later than 3 years and not later than 4 years
16
14
Later than 4 years and not later than 5 years
18
19
Later than 5 years
124
138
Net investment in finance leases
213
235
Equipment leased to customers under finance leases primarily relates to structured financing transactions to fund the purchase of aircraft, ships
and other large individual value items. There was an allowance for uncollectable finance lease receivables included in the allowance for
impairment losses for the Group of £1 million (2020: £nil).
Note 15: Goodwill
The Group
2021
2020
£m
£m
At 1 January and 31 December
325
325
The goodwill held in the Group’s balance sheet is tested at least annually for impairment. This compares the estimated recoverable amount,
being the higher of a cash-generating unit’s fair value less costs to sell and its value in use, with the carrying value. When this indicates that the
carrying value is not recoverable it is written down through the income statement as goodwill impairment. For the purposes of impairment
testing the goodwill is allocated to the appropriate cash generating unit; the entire balance of £325 million has been allocated to the Bank of
Scotland cash generating unit.
The recoverable amount of goodwill carried at 31 December 2021 has been based upon value in use. This calculation uses cash flow projections
based upon the Group’s business plan where the main assumptions used for planning purposes relate to the current economic outlook and
opinions in respect of economic growth, unemployment, property markets, interest rates and credit quality. The discount rate used in
discounting the projected cash flows is 10.25 per cent (post-tax) and a future growth rate of 3.5 per cent, reflecting the perceived risks within
those businesses. Management believes that any reasonably possible change in the key assumptions would not cause the recoverable amount
to fall below the balance sheet carrying value.
Note 16: Investment in subsidiary undertakings of the Company
2021
2020
£m
£m
At 1 January
22,552
22,519
Capital contributions
36
33
At 31 December
22,588
22,552
Details of the subsidiaries and related undertakings are given on page 99 and are incorporated by reference.
Certain subsidiary companies currently have insufficient distributable reserves to make dividend payments, however, there were no further
significant restrictions on any of the Company’s subsidiaries in paying dividends or repaying loans and advances. Regulated banking
subsidiaries are required to maintain capital at levels agreed with the regulators; this may impact those subsidiaries’ ability to make
distributions.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 14: Finance lease receivables (continued)
55
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Property, plant and equipment:
Investment properties
4
4
Premises
287
317
Equipment
244
261
Right-of-use assets (note 18)
573
648
1,108
1,230
Capitalised software enhancements
224
224
Settlement balances
92
Prepayments
107
97
Other assets
122
201
1
2
Total other assets
1,561
1,844
1
2
Note 18: Lessee disclosures
The table below sets out the movement in the Group’s right-of-use assets, which are primarily in respect of premises, and are recognised within
other assets (note 17).
The Group
2021
2020
£m
£m
At 1 January
648
730
Additions
17
18
Disposals
(7)
(8)
Depreciation charge for the year
(85)
(92)
At 31 December
573
648
The Group’s lease liabilities are recognised within other liabilities (note 21). The maturity analysis of the Group’s lease liabilities on an
undiscounted basis is set out in the liquidity risk section of note 36.
The total cash outflow for leases in the year ended 31 December 2021 was £105 million. The amount recognised within interest expense in
respect of lease liabilities is disclosed in note 4.
Note 19: Debt securities in issue
The Group
2021
2020
£m
£m
Medium-term notes issued
4,048
2,065
Covered bonds (note 20)
1,651
3,243
Securitisation notes (note 20)
1,654
2,989
Total debt securities in issue
7,353
8,297
At 31 December 2021 £4,705 million (2020: £5,898 million) of debt securities in issue of the Group had a contractual residual maturity of greater
than one year.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 17: Other assets
56
The Group’s interests in structured entities are consolidated. Details of the Group’s interests in these structured entities are set out below for
securitisations and covered bond vehicles.
Securitisation programmes
The Group’s balance sheet includes loans securitised under the Group’s securitisation programmes, the majority of which have been sold by
Group companies to bankruptcy remote structured entities. As the structured entities are funded by the issue of debt on terms whereby the
majority of the risks and rewards of the portfolio are retained by the Group company, the structured entities are consolidated fully and all of
these loans are retained on the Group’s balance sheet, with the related notes in issue included within debt securities in issue and financial
liabilities at fair value through profit or loss.
Covered bond programmes
Certain loans and advances to customers have been assigned to bankruptcy remote limited liability partnerships to provide security for issues of
covered bonds by the Group. The Group retains all of the risks and rewards associated with these loans and the partnerships are consolidated
fully with the loans retained on the Group’s balance sheet, and the related covered bonds in issue included within debt securities in issue.
The Group’s principal securitisation and covered bond programmes, together with the balances of the advances subject to these arrangements
and the carrying value of the notes in issue at 31 December, are listed below. The notes in issue are reported in note 19 and on the balance
sheet within financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss.
2021
2020
Loans and
advances
securitised
Notes in
issue
Loans and
advances
securitised
Notes in
issue
£m
£m
£m
£m
Securitisation programmes
UK residential mortgages
18,300
16,215
23,504
21,119
Commercial loans
388
388
774
774
Credit card receivables
3,413
4,121
3,226
4,340
22,101
20,724
27,504
26,233
Less held by the Group
(19,037)
(23,199)
Total securitisation programmes (note 19)1
1,687
3,034
Covered bond programmes
Residential mortgage-backed
2,574
1,151
3,076
2,743
Social housing loan-backed
833
500
980
600
3,407
1,651
4,056
3,343
Less held by the Group
(100)
Total covered bond programmes (note 19)
1,651
3,243
Total securitisation and covered bond programmes
3,338
6,277
1Includes £33 million (2020: £45 million) of securitisation notes held at fair value through profit or loss.
Cash deposits of £1,286 million (2020: £1,485 million) which support the debt securities issued by the structured entities, the term advances
related to covered bonds and other legal obligations, are held by the Group. Additionally, the Group has certain contractual arrangements to
provide liquidity facilities to some of these structured entities. At 31 December 2021 these obligations had not been triggered; the maximum
exposure under these facilities was £4 million (2020: £4 million).
The Group has a number of covered bond programmes, for which limited liability partnerships have been established to ring-fence asset pools
and guarantee the covered bonds issued by the Group. At the reporting date the Group had over-collateralised these programmes as set out in
the table above to meet the terms of the programmes, to secure the rating of the covered bonds and to provide operational flexibility. From
time to time, the obligations of the Group to provide collateral may increase due to the formal requirements of the programmes. The Group
may also voluntarily contribute collateral to support the ratings of the covered bonds.
The Group recognises the full liabilities associated with its securitisation and covered bond programmes within debt securities in issue and
financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss, although the obligations of the Group in respect of its securitisation issuances are limited
to the cash flows generated from the underlying assets. The Group could be required to provide additional support to a number of the
securitisation programmes to support the credit ratings of the debt securities issued, in the form of increased cash reserves and the holding of
subordinated notes. Further, certain programmes contain contractual obligations that require the Group to repurchase assets should they
become credit-impaired or as otherwise required by the transaction documents.
Note 21: Other liabilities
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Settlement balances
58
24
Lease liabilities
627
699
Accruals and other creditors
944
915
3
7
Total other liabilities
1,629
1,638
3
7
The maturity analysis of the Group's lease liabilities on an undiscounted basis is set out in the liquidity risk section of note 36.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 20: Structured entities
57
The Group
2021
2020
£m
£m
Defined benefit pension schemes
112
116
Other post-retirement benefit schemes
1
1
Total defined benefit schemes
113
117
Defined contribution pension schemes
93
92
Total charge to the income statement (note 8)
206
209
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Amounts recognised in the balance sheet
Retirement benefit assets
1,749
674
1,691
605
Retirement benefit obligations
(129)
(139)
(129)
(139)
Total amounts recognised in the balance sheet
1,620
535
1,562
466
The total amounts recognised in the balance sheet relate to:
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Defined benefit pension schemes
1,658
576
1,600
507
Other post-retirement benefit schemes
(38)
(41)
(38)
(41)
Total amounts recognised in the balance sheet
1,620
535
1,562
466
Pension schemes
Defined benefit schemes
(i)Characteristics of and risks associated with the Group’s schemes
The Group has established a number of defined benefit pension schemes in the UK and overseas. All significant schemes are based in the UK,
with the most significant one being the HBOS Final Salary Pension Scheme. At 31 December 2021, this scheme represented 95 per cent of the
Group’s total gross defined benefit pension assets (2020: 95 per cent). These schemes provide retirement benefits calculated as a proportion of
final pensionable salary depending upon the length of pensionable service; the minimum retirement age under the rules of the schemes at 31
December 2021 is generally 55, although certain categories of member are deemed to have a protected right to retire at 50.
The Group operates both funded and unfunded pension arrangements; the most significant schemes are funded schemes in the UK. All of
these UK funded schemes are operated as separate legal entities under trust law, are in compliance with the Pensions Act 2004 and are
managed by a Trustee Board (the Trustee) whose role is to ensure that their scheme is administered in accordance with the scheme rules and
relevant legislation, and to safeguard the assets in the best interests of all members and beneficiaries. The Trustee is solely responsible for
setting investment policy and for agreeing funding requirements with the employer through the funding valuation process. The Board of
Trustees must be composed of representatives of the scheme membership along with a combination of independent and employer appointed
trustees to comply with legislation and scheme rules.
A valuation to determine the funding status of each scheme is carried out at least every three years, whereby scheme assets are measured at
market value and liabilities (technical provisions) are measured using prudent assumptions. If a deficit is identified a recovery plan is agreed
between the employer and the scheme Trustee and sent to the Pensions Regulator for review. The Group has not provided for these deficit
contributions as the future economic benefits arising from these contributions are expected to be available to the Group. The Group’s overseas
defined benefit pension schemes are subject to local regulatory arrangements.
The most recent triennial funding valuations of the Group's main defined benefit pension scheme showed an aggregate ongoing funding deficit
of £2.6 billion as at 31 December 2019 (a funding level of 85.2 per cent) compared to a £2.7 billion deficit at 31 December 2016 (a funding level
of 84.6 per cent). The revised deficit now includes an allowance for the impact of RPI reform announced by the Chancellor of the Exchequer in
November 2020, and which is subject to judicial review in 2022. The latest annual update as at 31 December 2020 showed the funding deficit
had improved to £2.2 billion. Under the agreed recovery plan, c.£0.3 billion plus a further c.11 per cent of Lloyds Banking Group plc's in-year
capital distributions to ordinary shareholders, up to a limit on total deficit contributions of £0.7 billion per annum, is payable from 2021 until the
2019 deficit has been removed. The deficit contributions are in addition to the regular contributions to meet benefits accruing over the year,
and to cover the expenses of running the scheme. £0.4 billion of deficit contributions were paid to this scheme in 2021. The Group expects to
pay contributions of at least £0.4 billion to its main defined benefit scheme in 2022.
The Group has also established a private limited company which holds assets to provide security for the Group’s obligations to the HBOS Final
Salary Pension Scheme. At 31 December 2021 it held assets of £4.1 billion in aggregate. The private limited company is consolidated fully in the
Group’s balance sheet. The terms of this arrangement requires the Group to maintain assets in this vehicle to agreed minimum values in order
to secure obligations owed to the HBOS Final Salary Pension Scheme. The Group has satisfied this requirement during 2021.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 22: Retirement benefit obligations
58
The last funding valuations of other Group schemes were carried out on a number of different dates. In order to report the position under IAS
19 as at 31 December 2021, the most recent valuation results for all schemes have been updated by qualified independent actuaries. The
funding valuations use a more prudent approach to setting the discount rate and more conservative longevity assumptions than the IAS 19
valuations.
In a judgment in 2018, the High Court confirmed the requirement to equalise the Guaranteed Minimum Pension (GMP) benefits of men and
women accruing between 1990 and 1997 from contracting out of the State Earnings Related Pension Scheme. The Group recognised a past
service cost of £31 million in respect of equalisation in 2018 and, following agreement of the detailed implementation approach with the
Trustee, a further £3 million was recognised in 2019. A further hearing was held during 2020 which confirmed the extent of the Trustee's
obligation to revisit past transfers out of the schemes. The amount of any additional liability as a result of this judgment is still being reviewed
but is not considered likely to be material.
(ii)Amounts in the financial statements
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Amount included in the balance sheet
Present value of funded obligations
(16,614)
(17,624)
(16,342)
(17,335)
Fair value of scheme assets
18,272
18,200
17,942
17,842
Net amount recognised in the balance sheet
1,658
576
1,600
507
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Net amount recognised in the balance sheet
At 1 January
576
65
507
19
Net defined benefit pension charge
(112)
(116)
(111)
(115)
Actuarial gains on defined benefit obligation
698
(1,985)
725
(1,970)
Return on plan assets
(15)
2,180
(30)
2,143
Employer contributions
511
432
511
431
Exchange and other adjustments
(2)
(1)
At 31 December
1,658
576
1,600
507
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Movements in the defined benefit obligation
At 1 January
(17,624)
(15,915)
(17,335)
(15,649)
Current service cost
(102)
(98)
(102)
(98)
Interest expense
(250)
(321)
(247)
(317)
Remeasurements:
Actuarial gains (losses) – experience
19
43
31
39
Actuarial (losses) gains – demographic assumptions
(62)
24
(59)
24
Actuarial gains (losses) – financial assumptions
741
(2,052)
753
(2,033)
Benefits paid
626
695
603
682
Past service cost
(7)
(2)
(7)
(2)
Settlements
22
20
22
20
Exchange and other adjustments
23
(18)
(1)
(1)
At 31 December
(16,614)
(17,624)
(16,342)
(17,335)
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Analysis of the defined benefit obligation
Active members
(2,522)
(2,864)
(2,522)
(2,864)
Deferred members
(6,121)
(6,606)
(6,001)
(6,465)
Pensioners
(7,430)
(7,624)
(7,278)
(7,476)
Dependants
(541)
(530)
(541)
(530)
At 31 December
(16,614)
(17,624)
(16,342)
(17,335)
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 22: Retirement benefit obligations (continued)
59
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Changes in the fair value of scheme assets
At 1 January
18,200
15,980
17,842
15,668
Return on plan assets excluding amounts included in interest income
(15)
2,180
(30)
2,143
Interest income
260
326
257
322
Employer contributions
511
432
511
431
Benefits paid
(626)
(695)
(603)
(682)
Settlements
(22)
(22)
(22)
(22)
Administrative costs paid
(13)
(19)
(12)
(18)
Exchange and other adjustments
(23)
18
(1)
At 31 December
18,272
18,200
17,942
17,842
The expense recognised in the income statement for the year ended 31 December comprises:
The Group
2021
2020
£m
£m
Current service cost
102
98
Net interest amount
(10)
(5)
Settlements
2
Past service cost – plan amendments
7
2
Plan administration costs incurred during the year
13
19
Total defined benefit pension expense
112
116
(iii)Composition of scheme assets
2021
2020
Quoted
Unquoted
Total
Quoted
Unquoted
Total
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Equity instruments
194
12
206
193
11
204
Debt instruments1:
Fixed interest government bonds
5,971
5,971
6,568
6,568
Index-linked government bonds
8,443
8,443
7,418
7,418
Corporate and other debt securities
4,748
4,748
4,321
4,321
19,162
19,162
18,307
18,307
Property
139
139
136
136
Pooled investment vehicles
359
3,994
4,353
216
4,317
4,533
Money market instruments, cash, derivatives
and other assets and liabilities
460
(6,048)
(5,588)
436
(5,416)
(4,980)
At 31 December
20,175
(1,903)
18,272
19,152
(952)
18,200
1Of the total debt instruments, £17,211 million (2020: £15,920 million) were investment grade (credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’).
2021
2020
Quoted
Unquoted
Total
Quoted
Unquoted
Total
The Company
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Equity instruments
194
12
206
193
11
204
Debt instruments1:
Fixed interest government bonds
5,950
5,950
6,515
6,515
Index-linked government bonds
8,443
8,443
7,418
7,418
Corporate and other debt securities
4,676
4,676
4,253
4,253
19,069
19,069
18,186
18,186
Property
136
136
Pooled investment vehicles
359
3,815
4,174
216
4,136
4,352
Money market instruments, cash, derivatives
and other assets and liabilities
460
(5,967)
(5,507)
436
(5,472)
(5,036)
At 31 December
20,082
(2,140)
17,942
19,031
(1,189)
17,842
1Of the total debt instruments, £17,119 million (2020: £15,801 million) were investment grade (credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’).
The assets of all the funded plans are held independently of the Group’s assets in separate trustee-administered funds.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 22: Retirement benefit obligations (continued)
60
The pension schemes’ pooled investment vehicles comprise:
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Equity funds
897
941
897
941
Hedge and mutual funds
473
754
473
754
Alternative credit funds
1,331
1,368
1,231
1,262
Property funds
329
399
329
396
Infrastructure funds
744
785
744
785
Liquidity funds
494
235
446
213
Bond and debt funds
54
54
Other
31
51
1
At 31 December
4,353
4,533
4,174
4,352
The Trustee’s approach to investment is focused on acting in the members’ best financial interests, with the integration of ESG (Environmental,
Social and Governance) considerations into investment management processes and practices. This policy is reviewed annually (or more
frequently as required) and has been shared with the schemes’ investment managers for implementation.
(iv)Assumptions
The principal actuarial and financial assumptions used in valuations of the defined benefit pension schemes were as follows:
2021
2020
%
%
Discount rate
1.94
1.44
Rate of inflation:
Retail Price Index (RPI)
3.21
2.80
Consumer Price Index (CPI)
2.92
2.41
Rate of salary increases
0.00
0.00
Weighted-average rate of increase for pensions in payment
3.05
2.86
On 25 November 2020 the Chancellor of the Exchequer announced the outcome of a consultation into a reform of the calculation of RPI. It is
now expected that from 2030 RPI will be aligned with CPIH (the Consumer Price Index including owner-occupiers' housing costs). To determine
the RPI assumption a term-dependent inflation curve has been used adjusting for an assumed inflation risk premium. In the period to 2030 a
gap of 100 basis points has been assumed between RPI and CPI; thereafter no gap has been assumed. The RPI reform is subject to judicial
review in 2022, and its outcome may impact these assumptions in the future.
2021
2020
Years
Years
Life expectancy for member aged 60, on the valuation date:
Men
27.1
27.0
Women
29.1
29.0
Life expectancy for member aged 60, 15 years after the valuation date:
Men
28.1
28.1
Women
30.3
30.2
The mortality assumptions used in the UK scheme valuations are based on standard tables published by the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries
which were adjusted in line with the actual experience of the relevant schemes. The table shows that a member retiring at age 60 at 31
December 2021 is assumed to live for, on average, 27.1 years for a male and 29.1 years for a female. In practice there will be much variation
between individual members but these assumptions are expected to be appropriate across all members. It is assumed that younger members
will live longer in retirement than those retiring now. This reflects the expectation that mortality rates will continue to fall over time as medical
science and standards of living improve. To illustrate the degree of improvement assumed, the table also shows the life expectancy for
members aged 45 now, when they retire in 15 years’ time at age 60. The Group has considered the impact of COVID-19 and evidence to date
indicates that this did not have a material impact on the defined benefit obligation. The Group uses the CMI mortality projections model and in
line with actuarial industry recommendations has placed no weight on 2020 mortality experience.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 22: Retirement benefit obligations (continued)
61
(v)Amount, timing and uncertainty of future cash flows
Risk exposure of the defined benefit schemes
While the Group is not exposed to any unusual, entity-specific or scheme-specific risks in its defined benefit pension schemes, it is exposed to a
number of significant risks, detailed below:
Inflation rate risk: The majority of the plans’ benefit obligations are linked to inflation both in deferment and once in payment. Higher inflation
will lead to higher liabilities although this will be materially offset by holdings of inflation-linked gilts and, in most cases, caps on the level of
inflationary increases are in place to protect against extreme inflation.
Interest rate risk: The defined benefit obligation is determined using a discount rate derived from yields on AA-rated corporate bonds. A
decrease in corporate bond yields will increase plan liabilities although this will be materially offset by an increase in the value of bond holdings
and through the use of derivatives.
Longevity risk: The majority of the schemes' obligations are to provide benefits for the life of the members so increases in life expectancy will
result in an increase in the plans’ liabilities.
Investment risk: Scheme assets are invested in a diversified portfolio of debt securities, equities and other return-seeking assets. If the assets
underperform the discount rate used to calculate the defined benefit obligation, it will reduce the surplus or increase the deficit. Volatility in
asset values and the discount rate will lead to volatility in the net pension asset on the Group’s balance sheet and in other comprehensive
income. To a lesser extent this will also lead to volatility in the pension expense in the Group’s income statement.
The ultimate cost of the defined benefit obligations to the Group will depend upon actual future events rather than the assumptions made. The
assumptions made are unlikely to be borne out in practice and as such the cost may be higher or lower than expected.
Sensitivity analysis
The effect of reasonably possible changes in key assumptions on the value of scheme liabilities and the resulting pension charge in the Group’s
income statement and on the net defined benefit pension scheme asset, for the Group’s material schemes, is set out below. The sensitivities
provided assume that all other assumptions and the value of the schemes’ assets remain unchanged, and are not intended to represent
changes that are at the extremes of possibility. The calculations are approximate in nature and full detailed calculations could lead to a different
result. It is unlikely that isolated changes to individual assumptions will be experienced in practice. Due to the correlation of assumptions,
aggregating the effects of these isolated changes may not be a reasonable estimate of the actual effect of simultaneous changes in multiple
assumptions.
Effect of reasonably possible alternative assumptions on material schemes
The Group
The Company
Increase (decrease)
in the income
statement charge
(Increase) decrease in the
net defined benefit
pension scheme surplus
Increase (decrease)
in the income
statement charge
(Increase) decrease in the
net defined benefit
pension scheme surplus
2021
2020
2021
2020
2021
2020
2021
2020
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Inflation (including pension increases)1:
Increase of 0.1 per cent
5
4
172
194
5
4
172
194
Decrease of 0.1 per cent
(5)
(4)
(169)
(190)
(5)
(4)
(169)
(190)
Discount rate2:
Increase of 0.1 per cent
(10)
(8)
(295)
(332)
(10)
(8)
(295)
(332)
Decrease of 0.1 per cent
9
8
303
342
9
8
303
342
Expected life expectancy of members:
Increase of one year
17
15
680
776
17
15
680
776
Decrease of one year
(16)
(15)
(652)
(741)
(16)
(15)
(652)
(741)
1At 31 December 2021, the assumed rate of RPI inflation is 3.21 per cent and CPI inflation 2.92 per cent (2020: RPI 2.80 per cent and CPI 2.41 per cent).
2At 31 December 2021, the assumed discount rate is 1.94 per cent (2020: 1.44 per cent).
Sensitivity analysis method and assumptions
The sensitivity analysis above reflects the impact on the liabilities of the Group’s most material schemes. While differences in the underlying
liability profiles for the remainder of the Group’s pension arrangements mean they may exhibit slightly different sensitivities to variations in
these assumptions, the sensitivities provided above are indicative of the impact across the Group as a whole.
The inflation assumption sensitivity applies to the assumed rate of increase in both the Consumer Price Index (CPI) and the Retail Price Index
(RPI), and includes the impact on the rate of increases to pensions, both before and after retirement. These pension increases are linked to
inflation (either CPI or RPI) subject to certain minimum and maximum limits.
The sensitivity analysis (including the inflation sensitivity) does not include the impact of any change in the rate of salary increases as
pensionable salaries have been frozen since 2 April 2014.
The life expectancy assumption has been applied by allowing for an increase/decrease in life expectation from age 60 of one year, based upon
the approximate weighted average age for each scheme. While this is an approximate approach and will not give the same result as a one year
increase in life expectancy at every age, it provides an appropriate indication of the potential impact on the schemes from changes in life
expectancy.
There was no change in the methods and assumptions used in preparing the sensitivity analysis from the prior year.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 22: Retirement benefit obligations (continued)
62
Asset-liability matching strategies
The main schemes’ assets are invested in a diversified portfolio, consisting primarily of debt securities. The investment strategy is not static and
will evolve to reflect the structure of liabilities within the schemes. Specific asset-liability matching strategies for each pension plan are
independently determined by the responsible governance body for each scheme and in consultation with the employer.
A significant goal of the asset-liability matching strategies adopted by Group schemes is to reduce volatility caused by changes in market
expectations of interest rates and inflation. In the main scheme, this is achieved by investing scheme assets in bonds, primarily fixed interest
gilts and index linked gilts, and by entering into interest rate and inflation swap arrangements. These investments are structured to take into
account the profile of scheme liabilities and actively managed to reflect both changing market conditions and changes to the liability profile. At
31 December 2021 the asset-liability matching strategy mitigated around 118 per cent of the liability sensitivity to interest rate movements and
around 126 per cent of the liability sensitivity to inflation movements. In addition, a small amount of interest rate sensitivity arises through
holdings of corporate and other debt securities. The higher level of hedging provides greater protection to the funding position of the
schemes.
On 28 January 2020, the main scheme entered into a £3 billion longevity insurance arrangement to hedge part of the scheme's exposure to
unexpected increases in life expectancy. This arrangement forms part of the scheme's investment portfolio and will provide income to the
scheme in the event that pensions are paid out for longer than expected. The transaction was structured as a pass-through with Scottish
Widows as the insurer, and onwards reinsurance to Pacific Life Re Limited. The valuation of the swap was £nil at inception and whilst there has
been a slightly higher than expected number of deaths in the population covered by the arrangement, this has not had a material impact on the
value of the swap. At 31 December 2021 the value of this swap was £0.8 million, and is reflected in the value of scheme assets.
Maturity profile of defined benefit obligation
The following table provides information on the weighted average duration of the defined benefit pension obligation and the distribution and
timing of benefit payments:
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
Years
Years
Years
Years
Duration of the defined benefit obligation
19
20
19
20
Maturity analysis of benefits expected to be paid:
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Within 12 months
386
354
379
346
Between 1 and 2 years
406
383
400
375
Between 2 and 5 years
1,360
1,265
1,339
1,242
Between 5 and 10 years
2,751
2,562
2,710
2,519
Between 10 and 15 years
3,245
3,068
3,198
3,021
Between 15 and 25 years
6,657
6,414
6,555
6,319
Between 25 and 35 years
5,497
5,372
5,416
5,299
Between 35 and 45 years
3,239
3,263
3,195
3,224
In more than 45 years
1,229
1,300
1,214
1,286
Maturity analysis method and assumptions
The projected benefit payments are based on the assumptions underlying the assessment of the obligations, including allowance for expected
future inflation. They are shown in their undiscounted form and therefore appear large relative to the discounted assessment of the defined
benefit obligations recognised in the Group’s balance sheet. They are in respect of benefits that have been accrued prior to the respective year-
end date only and make no allowance for any benefits that may have been accrued subsequently.
Defined contribution schemes
The Group operates a number of defined contribution pension schemes in the UK and overseas, principally Your Tomorrow.
During the year ended 31 December 2021 the charge to the income statement in respect of defined contribution schemes was £93 million
(2020: £92 million), representing the contributions payable by the employer in accordance with each scheme’s rules.
Other post-retirement benefit schemes
The Group operates a number of schemes which provide post-retirement healthcare benefits to certain employees, retired employees and their
dependants.
For the principal post-retirement healthcare scheme, the latest actuarial valuation of the liability was carried out at 31 December 2021 by
qualified independent actuaries. The principal assumptions used were as set out above, except that the rate of increase in healthcare premiums
has been assumed at 6.82 per cent (2020: 6.40 per cent).
Movements in the other post-retirement benefits obligation:
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 22: Retirement benefit obligations (continued)
63
The Group and Company
2021
2020
£m
£m
At 1 January
(41)
(43)
Actuarial gains (losses)
3
1
Insurance premiums paid
1
1
Charge for the year
(1)
(1)
Exchange and other adjustments
1
At 31 December
(38)
(41)
Note 23: Deferred tax
The Group’s and the Company’s deferred tax assets and liabilities are as follows:
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Statutory position
Deferred tax assets
1,502
1,582
Deferred tax liabilities
(390)
(50)
Net deferred tax asset (liability) at 31 December
1,502
1,582
(390)
(50)
Tax disclosure
Deferred tax assets
2,114
1,813
34
65
Deferred tax liabilities
(612)
(231)
(424)
(115)
Net deferred tax asset (liability) at 31 December
1,502
1,582
(390)
(50)
The statutory position reflects the deferred tax assets and liabilities as disclosed in the consolidated balance sheet and takes into account the
ability of the Group and the Company to net assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right of offset. The tax disclosure of
deferred tax assets and liabilities ties to the amounts outlined in the tables below which splits the deferred tax assets and liabilities by type,
before such netting.
Finance Act 2021, which was substantively enacted on 24 May 2021, increases the rate of corporation tax from 19 per cent to 25 per cent with
effect from 1 April 2023. The impact of this rate change is an increase in the Group’s net deferred tax asset as at 31 December 2021 of
£325 million, comprising a £420 million credit included in the income statement and a £95 million charge included in equity. The tax credit in
2020 included an uplift in deferred tax assets following the announcement by the UK Government that it would maintain the corporation tax rate
at 19 per cent.
On 27 October 2021, the UK Government announced its intention to decrease the rate of banking surcharge from 8 per cent to 3 per cent with
effect from 1 April 2023. This change was substantively enacted on 2 February 2022 and its impact on deferred tax is therefore not included in
these financial statements. Had this change in banking surcharge rate been substantively enacted at 31 December 2021, the impact would have
been to recognise a £6 million deferred tax charge in the income statement and a £1 million charge within other comprehensive income,
reducing the Group's net deferred tax asset by £7 million.
Movements in deferred tax assets and liabilities (before taking into consideration the offsetting of balances within the same taxing jurisdiction)
can be summarised as follows:
The Group
Deferred tax assets
Tax
losses
Property,
plant and
equipment
Provisions
Share-
based
payments
Pension
liabilities
Derivatives
Asset
revaluations1
Other
temporary
differences
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 1 January 2020
1,402
144
92
11
22
14
2
22
1,709
Credit (charge) to the income statement
145
(41)
(4)
(5)
4
(2)
3
100
Credit to other comprehensive income
1
3
4
At 31 December 2020
1,547
103
88
6
27
17
25
1,813
Credit (charge) to the income statement
280
2
(2)
8
4
292
(Charge) credit to other comprehensive
income
(2)
11
9
At 31 December 2021
1,827
103
90
4
33
28
29
2,114
1Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 22: Retirement benefit obligations (continued)
64
The Group
Deferred tax liabilities
Capitalised
software
enhancements
Pension
assets
Asset
revaluations1
Other
temporary
differences
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 1 January 2020
(2)
(30)
(21)
(53)
Charge to the income statement
(14)
(61)
(4)
(53)
(132)
Charge to other comprehensive income
(43)
(2)
(45)
Exchange and other adjustments
(1)
(1)
At 31 December 2020
(16)
(134)
(6)
(75)
(231)
Charge to the income statement
(4)
(84)
(13)
(67)
(168)
Charge (credit) to other comprehensive income
(224)
12
(212)
Exchange and other adjustments
(1)
(1)
At 31 December 2021
(20)
(442)
(7)
(143)
(612)
The Company
Deferred tax assets
Pension
liabilities
Provisions
Total
£m
£m
£m
At 1 January 2020
23
51
74
Credit (charge) to the income statement
3
(14)
(11)
Credit to other comprehensive income
1
1
Exchange and other adjustments
1
1
At 31 December 2020
27
38
65
Credit (charge) to the income statement
9
(38)
(29)
Charge to other comprehensive income
(2)
(2)
At 31 December 2021
34
34
The Company
Deferred tax liabilities
Pension
assets
Other
temporary
differences
Total
£m
£m
£m
At 1 January 2020
(19)
(19)
Charge to the income statement
(59)
(59)
Charge to other comprehensive income
(37)
(37)
At 31 December 2020
(115)
(115)
Charge to the income statement
(84)
(1)
(85)
Charge to other comprehensive income
(224)
(224)
At 31 December 2021
(423)
(1)
(424)
1Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income.
At 31 December 2021 the Group carried net deferred tax assets on its balance sheet of £1,502 million (2020: £1,582 million) and the Company
carried deferred tax liabilities of £390 million (2020: £50 million) principally relating to tax losses carried forward.
Estimation of income taxes includes the assessment of recoverability of deferred tax assets. Deferred tax assets are only recognised to the
extent that they are considered more likely than not to be recoverable based on existing tax laws and forecasts of future taxable profits against
which the underlying tax deductions can be utilised. The Group has recognised a deferred tax asset of £1,827 million (2020: £1,547 million), in
respect of trading losses carried forward. Substantially all of these losses have arisen in Bank of Scotland plc and they will be utilised as taxable
profits arise in this legal entity in future periods.
The Group’s expectations of future UK taxable profits require management judgement, and take into account the Group’s long-term financial
and strategic plans and anticipated future tax-adjusting items. In making this assessment, account is taken of business plans, the Board-
approved operating plan and the expected future economic outlook as set out in the strategic report, as well as the risks associated with future
regulatory, climate-related and other change, in order to produce a base case forecast of future UK taxable profits. Under current law there is no
expiry date for UK trading losses not yet utilised, and given the forecast of future profitability and the Group’s commitment to the UK market, in
management's judgement it is more likely than not that the value of the losses will be recovered by the Group while still operating as a going
concern. Banking tax losses that arose before 1 April 2015 can only be used against 25 per cent of taxable profits arising after 1 April 2016, and
they cannot be used to reduce the surcharge on banking profits. These restrictions in utilisation mean that the value of the deferred tax asset in
respect of tax losses is only expected to be fully recovered by 2034 (2020: 2034) in the base case forecast. It is possible that future tax law
changes could materially affect the timing of recovery and the value of these losses ultimately realised by the Group. The value of the deferred
tax asset in respect of tax losses increased by £414 million in 2021 as a result of the change in UK tax rates.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 23: Deferred tax (continued)
65
Deferred tax not recognised
Deferred tax assets of £31 million (2020: £11 million) for the Group have not been recognised in respect of £126 million of UK tax losses and
other temporary differences which can only be used to offset future capital gains. UK capital losses can be carried forward indefinitely.
No deferred tax asset was recognised in 2020 in respect of unrelieved foreign tax credits of £40 million for the Group as there were no expected
profits against which the credits could be utilised. The formal closure of the branches in respect of which these credits arose means that the
credits have now been extinguished.
No deferred tax has been recognised in respect of foreign trade losses of £34 million (2020: £33 million) for the Group which will expire if not
used within 20 years, nor £2 million (2020: £37 million) for the Group which can be carried forward indefinitely.
As a result of parent company exemptions on dividends from subsidiaries and on capital gains on disposal there are no significant taxable
temporary differences associated with investments in subsidiaries, branches, associates and joint arrangements.
Note 24: Other provisions
The Group
Provisions
for financial
commitments
and guarantees
Regulatory
and legal
provisions
Other
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 1 January 2021
129
230
162
521
Exchange and other adjustments
(1)
1
Provisions applied
(377)
(31)
(408)
(Release) charge for the year
(72)
982
34
944
At 31 December 2021
56
835
166
1,057
Provisions for financial commitments and guarantees
Provisions are recognised for expected credit losses on undrawn loan commitments and financial guarantees. See also note 13.
Regulatory and legal provisions
In the course of its business, the Group is engaged in discussions with the PRA, FCA and other UK and overseas regulators and other
governmental authorities on a range of matters. The Group also receives complaints in connection with its past conduct and claims brought by
or on behalf of current and former employees, customers, investors and other third parties and is subject to legal proceedings and other legal
actions. Where significant, provisions are held against the costs expected to be incurred in relation to these matters and matters arising from
related internal reviews. During the year ended 31 December 2021 the Group charged a further £982 million in respect of legal actions and
other regulatory matters, including a charge in respect of HBOS Reading and charges for other legacy programmes.
The unutilised balance at 31 December 2021 was £835 million (31 December 2020: £230 million). The most significant items are as follows.
HBOS Reading – review
The Group completed its compensation assessment for those within the Customer Review in 2019 with more than £109 million of compensation
paid, in addition to £15 million for ex-gratia payments and £6 million for the reimbursement of legal fees. The Group is now applying the
recommendations from Sir Ross Cranston’s review, issued in December 2019, including a reassessment of direct and consequential losses by an
independent panel (the Foskett Panel), an extension of debt relief and a wider definition of de facto directors. The appeal process for the
further assessment of debt relief and de facto director status is now nearing completion. Further details of the Foskett Panel were announced
on 3 April 2020 and the Foskett Panel's full scope and methodology was published on 7 July 2020. The Foskett Panel’s stated objective is to
consider cases via a non-legalistic and fair process and to make their decisions in a generous, fair and common sense manner, assessing claims
against an expanded definition of the fraud and on a lower evidential basis.
Following the emergence of the first outcomes of the Foskett Panel through 2021, the Group has charged a further £790 million in the year
ended 31 December 2021, of which £600 million was recognised in the fourth quarter. This includes operational costs in relation to Dame Linda
Dobbs' review, which is considering whether the issues relating to HBOS Reading were investigated and appropriately reported by the Group
during the period from January 2009 to January 2017, and other programme costs. A significant proportion of the fourth quarter charge relates
to the estimated future awards from the Foskett Panel. To date the Foskett Panel has shared outcomes on a limited subset of the total
population which covers a wide range of businesses and different claim characteristics. The estimated awards provision recognised is therefore
materially dependent on the assumption that the limited number of awards to date are representative of the full population of cases. The 2021
charge increases the lifetime cost to £1,225 million. The final outcome could be significantly different from the current provision once the re-
review is concluded by the Foskett Panel. There is no confirmed timeline for the completion of the Foskett Panel re-review process. The Group
is committed to implementing Sir Ross's recommendations in full.
Payment protection insurance
The Group has made provisions for PPI costs over a number of years totalling £6,356 million. Good progress continues to be made towards
ensuring operational completeness, ahead of an orderly programme close. At 31 December 2021, a provision of £2 million remained
outstanding, with total cash payments of £54 million during the year.
In addition to the above provision, the Group continues to challenge PPI litigation cases, with mainly legal fees and operational costs associated
with litigation activity recognised within regulatory and legal provisions, including a charge in the fourth quarter. PPI litigation remains inherently
uncertain, with a number of key Court judgments due to be delivered in 2022.
Arrears handling related activities
To date the Group has provided a total of £679 million for arrears handling activities. The unutilised balance at 31 December 2021 was
£10 million.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 23: Deferred tax (continued)
66
The movement in subordinated liabilities during the year was as follows:
The Group
The Company
Preferred
securities
Undated
Dated
Preferred
securities
Undated
Dated
Total
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 1 January 2020
1,654
156
1,786
3,596
93
761
1,680
2,534
Issued during the year1:
SONIA 105 NC 5.5 Subordinated Floating
Rate Notes due 2026 (£1,000 million)
1,000
1,000
Repurchases and redemptions during the
year1:
7.281% Perpetual Regulatory Tier One
Securities (Series B) (£150 million)
(154)
(154)
6.85% Non-cumulative Perpetual Preferred
Securities (US$1,000 million)
(1,060)
(1,060)
(744)
(744)
7.881% Guaranteed Non-voting Non-
cumulative Preferred Securities
(£245 million)
(366)
(366)
4.50% Fixed Rate Step-up Subordinated
Notes due 2030 (€309 million)
(322)
(322)
(322)
(322)
(1,580)
(322)
(1,902)
(744)
(322)
(1,066)
Foreign exchange movements
(16)
25
55
64
(16)
55
39
Other movements (cash and non-cash)
125
(26)
(4)
95
20
10
(33)
(3)
At 31 December 2020
183
155
2,515
2,853
113
11
1,380
1,504
Issued during the year1:
Subordinated Floating Rate Note (24
September 2026) £500 million
500
500
Repurchases and redemptions during the
year1:
7.754% Non-cumulative Perpetual Preferred
Securities (Class B) (£150 million)
(156)
(156)
Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes
(US$250 million)
(24)
(24)
9.375% Subordinated Bonds 2021
(£500 million)
(200)
(200)
5.374% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2021
(€160 million)
(145)
(145)
(145)
(145)
6% Subordinated Notes 2033
(US$750 million)
(178)
(178)
(124)
(124)
(156)
(24)
(523)
(703)
(269)
(269)
Foreign exchange movements
1
(40)
(39)
(42)
(42)
Other movements (cash and non-cash)
8
(2)
(55)
(49)
37
1
(23)
15
At 31 December 2021
35
130
2,397
2,562
150
12
1,046
1,208
1Issuances in the year generated cash inflows for the Group of £500 million and £nil for the Company (2020: £1,000 million for the Group and £nil for the Company). The repurchases and
redemptions resulted in cash outflows of £696 million for the Group and £316 million for the Company (2020: £1,623 million for the Group and £1,068 million for the Company). Cash
payments in respect of interest on subordinated liabilities in the year amounted to £84 million for the Group and £69 million for the Company (2020: £191 million for the Group and
£137 million for the Company).
Certain of the above securities were issued or redeemed under exchange offers, which did not result in an extinguishment of the original
financial liability for accounting purposes.
These securities will, in the event of the winding-up of the issuer, be subordinated to the claims of depositors and all other creditors of the
issuer, other than creditors whose claims rank equally with, or are junior to, the claims of the holders of the subordinated liabilities. The
subordination of specific subordinated liabilities is determined in respect of the issuer and any guarantors of that liability. The claims of holders
of preference shares and preferred securities are generally junior to those of the holders of undated subordinated liabilities, which in turn are
junior to the claims of holders of the dated subordinated liabilities. Neither the Group nor the Company has had any defaults of principal,
interest or other breaches with respect to its subordinated liabilities during 2021 (2020: none).
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 25: Subordinated liabilities
67
(1)Authorised share capital
The Group and the Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
Number of shares
Number of shares
£m
£m
Sterling
Ordinary shares of 25p each
15,139,999,999
15,139,999,999
3,785
3,785
6.125% non-cumulative redeemable preference shares of £1 each
200,000,000
200,000,000
200
200
8.117% non-cumulative perpetual preference shares class "A" of £10 each
250,000
250,000
3
3
7.754% non-cumulative perpetual preference shares class "B" of £10 each
150,000
150,000
2
2
Preference shares of £1 each
2,596,834,398
2,596,834,398
2,597
2,597
6,587
6,587
US Dollars
US$m
US$m
Preference shares of US$1 each
4,997,750,000
4,997,750,000
4,998
4,998
Euro
€m
€m
Preference shares of €1 each
3,000,000,000
3,000,000,000
3,000
3,000
Japanese Yen
¥m
¥m
Preference shares of ¥250 each
400,000,000
400,000,000
100,000
100,000
Canadian Dollars
CAD$m
CAD$m
Preference shares of CAD$1 each
1,000,000,000
1,000,000,000
1,000
1,000
Australian Dollars
AUD$m
AUD$m
Preference shares of AUD$1 each
1,000,000,000
1,000,000,000
1,000
1,000
(2)Issued and fully paid share capital
The Group and the Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
Number of shares
Number of shares
£m
£m
Issued and fully paid ordinary shares
Ordinary shares of 25p each
At 1 January and 31 December
15,053,262,841
15,053,262,841
3,763
3,763
Issued and fully paid preference shares
Preferences shares of £1 each
At 1 January and 31 December
100
100
Total share capital at 31 December
3,763
3,763
(3)Share capital and control
There are no limitations on voting rights or restrictions on the transfer of shares in the Company other than as set out in the articles of
association, and certain restrictions which may from time to time be imposed by law and regulations (for example, insider trading laws).
Ordinary shares
The holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive the Company’s report and accounts, attend, speak and vote at general meetings and
appoint proxies to exercise voting rights. Holders of ordinary shares may also receive a dividend (subject to the provisions of the Company’s
articles of association) and on a winding up may share in the assets of the Company.
Issued and fully paid preference shares
The Company has in issue preference shares which are all classified as liabilities under accounting standards.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 26: Share capital
68
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Merger reserve and other reserves1
10,051
10,051
9,537
9,537
Capital redemption reserve1
141
141
141
141
Revaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other
comprehensive income
58
48
Cash flow hedging reserve
(63)
(45)
Foreign currency translation reserve
(22)
(23)
At 31 December
10,165
10,172
9,678
9,678
1There have been no movements in these reserves in 2021 or 2020.
Movements in other reserves were as follows:
The Group
2021
2020
Revaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other comprehensive income
£m
£m
At 1 January
48
27
Change in fair value
(2)
32
Deferred tax
(1)
(5)
Current tax
(2)
(3)
25
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals (note 7)
(7)
Deferred tax
13
3
13
(4)
At 31 December
58
48
The Group
2021
2020
Cash flow hedging reserve
£m
£m
At 1 January
(45)
(41)
Change in fair value of hedging derivatives
(48)
(3)
Deferred tax
16
2
(32)
(1)
Net income statement transfers
19
(4)
Deferred tax
(5)
1
14
(3)
At 31 December
(63)
(45)
The Group
2021
2020
Foreign currency translation reserve
£m
£m
At 1 January
(23)
(16)
Currency translation differences arising in the year
1
(7)
At 31 December
(22)
(23)
Note 28: Retained profits
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 1 January
(2,292)
(3,503)
9,204
8,888
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders1
1,734
1,021
1,224
142
Dividends paid (note 29)
(500)
(500)
Capital contributions received
36
33
36
33
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements
460
157
472
141
At 31 December
(562)
(2,292)
10,436
9,204
1No income statement has been shown for the Company, as permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 27: Other reserves
69
Dividends paid during the year were as follows:
2021
2020
£m
£m
Interim dividends
500
Note 30: Share-based payments
During the year ended 31 December 2021 Lloyds Banking Group plc operated a number of share-based payment schemes for which employees
of the HBOS Group were eligible and all of which are equity settled. Details of all schemes operated by Lloyds Banking Group are set out
below; these are managed and operated on a Lloyds Banking Group-wide basis. The amount charged to the Group’s income statement in
respect of Lloyds Banking Group share-based payment schemes, and which is included within staff costs (note 8), was £45 million (2020:
£48 million).
During the year ended 31 December 2021 the Lloyds Banking Group operated the following share-based payment schemes, all of which are
equity settled.
Lloyds Banking Group Performance Share plan
The Lloyds Banking Group operates a Group Performance Share plan that is equity settled. Bonuses in respect of employee service in 2021 have
been recognised in the charge in line with the proportion of the deferral period completed.
Save-As-You-Earn schemes
Eligible employees may enter into contracts through the Save-As-You-Earn (SAYE) schemes to save up to £500 per month and, at the expiry of a
fixed term of three years, have the option to use these savings within six months of the expiry of the fixed term to acquire shares in the Lloyds
Banking Group at a discounted price of no less than 80 per cent (90 per cent for the 2020 and 2021 plans) of the market price at the start of the
invitation.
Movements in the number of share options outstanding under the SAYE schemes are set out below:
2021
2020
Number
of options
Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
Number
of options
Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
Outstanding at 1 January
1,120,138,915
30.39
1,068,094,073
44.55
Granted
236,923,744
39.40
779,229,797
24.25
Exercised
(6,924,434)
30.57
(255,706,663)
47.51
Forfeited
(22,815,078)
28.78
(6,938,102)
43.30
Cancelled
(51,479,310)
32.57
(389,767,675)
42.24
Expired
(95,280,546)
49.03
(74,772,515)
47.26
Outstanding at 31 December
1,180,563,291
30.63
1,120,138,915
30.39
Exercisable at 31 December
336,561
51.03
792,741
47.49
The weighted average share price at the time that the options were exercised during 2021 was £0.47 (2020: £0.61). The weighted average
remaining contractual life of options outstanding at the end of the year was 2.46 years (2020: 2.98 years).
The weighted average fair value of SAYE options granted during 2021 was £0.09 (2020: £0.05). The fair values of the SAYE options have been
determined using a standard Black-Scholes model.
Other share option plans
Lloyds Banking Group Executive Share Plan 2003
The Plan was adopted in December 2003 and under the Plan share options may be granted to senior employees. Options under this plan have
been granted specifically to facilitate recruitment (to compensate new recruits for any lost share awards), and also to make grants to key
individuals for retention purposes. In some instances, grants may be made subject to individual performance conditions.
Participants are not entitled to any dividends paid during the vesting period.
2021
2020
Number
of options
Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
Number
of options
Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
Outstanding at 1 January
6,666,372
Nil
7,634,638
Nil
Granted
5,308,496
Nil
1,990,449
Nil
Exercised
(5,129,115)
Nil
(2,122,302)
Nil
Vested
Nil
(47,337)
Nil
Forfeited
(385,184)
Nil
(111,100)
Nil
Lapsed
(558,679)
Nil
(677,976)
Nil
Outstanding at 31 December
5,901,890
Nil
6,666,372
Nil
Exercisable at 31 December
708,939
Nil
3,150,407
Nil
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 29: Dividends on ordinary shares
70
The weighted average fair value of options granted in the year was £0.45 (2020: £0.33). The fair values of options granted have been determined
using a standard Black-Scholes model. The weighted average share price at the time that the options were exercised during 2021 was £0.44
(2020: £0.36). The weighted average remaining contractual life of options outstanding at the end of the year was 4.3 years (2020: 4.1 years).
Other share plans
Lloyds Banking Group Executive Group Ownership Share Plan
The plan, introduced in 2006, is aimed at delivering shareholder value by linking the receipt of shares to an improvement in the performance of
the Lloyds Banking Group over a three-year period. Awards are made within limits set by the rules of the plan, with the limits determining the
maximum number of shares that can be awarded equating to three times annual salary. In exceptional circumstances this may increase to four
times annual salary.
At the end of the performance period for the 2018 grant, the targets had not been fully met and therefore these awards vested in 2021 at a rate
of 33.75 per cent.
2021
2020
Number
of shares
Number
of shares
Outstanding at 1 January
533,987,527
459,904,745
Granted
211,214,605
Vested
(39,621,415)
(47,775,806)
Forfeited
(144,437,243)
(96,015,542)
Dividend award
944,758
6,659,525
Outstanding at 31 December
350,873,627
533,987,527
Awards in respect of the 2019 grant are due to vest in 2022 at a rate of 41.80 per cent. In previous years participants were entitled to any
dividends paid in the vesting period. However, following a regulatory change prohibiting the payment of dividend on such awards, the number
of shares awarded has been determined by applying a share price adjusted to exclude the value of estimated future dividends.
The weighted average fair value of the awards granted in 2020 was £0.28.
Lloyds Banking Group Long Term Share Plan
The plan, introduced in 2021, which replaced the Lloyds Banking Group Executive Group Ownership Share Plan, is intended to provide
alignment to our aim of delivering sustainable returns to shareholders, supported by our values and behaviours.
2021
Number
of shares
Granted
83,456,304
Forfeited
(5,573,236)
Outstanding at 31 December
77,883,068
The weighted average fair value of awards granted in the year was £0.36.
Chief Financial Officer buyout
William Chalmers joined the Lloyds Banking Group on 3 June 2019 and was appointed as Chief Financial Officer on 1 August 2019 on the
retirement of George Culmer. He was granted deferred share awards over 4,086,632 shares, to replace unvested awards from his former
employer, Morgan Stanley, that were forfeited as a result of him joining the Lloyds Banking Group.
2021
2020
Number
of shares
Number
of shares
Outstanding at 1 January
1,810,712
3,268,460
Exercised
(1,124,627)
(1,457,748)
Outstanding at 31 December
686,085
1,810,712
Group Chief Executive buyout
Charlie Nunn joined the Lloyds Banking Group on 16 August 2021 as Group Chief Executive. He was granted deferred share awards over
8,301,708 shares to replace unvested awards from his former employer, HSBC, that were forfeited as a result of him joining the Lloyds Banking
Group.
2021
Number
of shares
Granted
8,301,708
Exercised
(856,921)
Outstanding at 31 December
7,444,787
The weighted average fair value of awards granted in 2021 was £0.40.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 30: Share-based payments (continued)
71
Assumptions at 31 December 2021
The fair value calculations at 31 December 2021 for grants made in the year, using Black-Scholes models and Monte Carlo simulation, are based
on the following assumptions:
SAYE
Executive
Share Plan
2003
Long Term
Share Plan
Group Chief
Executive
buyout
Weighted average risk-free interest rate
0.49%
0.12%
0.16%
0.26%
Weighted average expected life
3.3 years
1.3 years
3.4 years
2.8 years
Weighted average expected volatility
28%
30%
31%
31%
Weighted average expected dividend yield
3.1%
3.2%
3.1%
3.1%
Weighted average share price
£0.45
£0.47
£0.40
£0.44
Weighted average exercise price
£0.39
Nil
Nil
Nil
Expected volatility is a measure of the amount by which the Lloyds Banking Group’s shares are expected to fluctuate during the life of an
option. The expected volatility is estimated based on the historical volatility of the closing daily share price over the most recent period that is
commensurate with the expected life of the option. The historical volatility is compared to the implied volatility generated from market traded
options in the Lloyds Banking Group’s shares to assess the reasonableness of the historical volatility and adjustments made where appropriate.
Share Incentive Plan
Free shares
An award of shares may be made annually to employees up to a maximum of £3,600. The shares awarded are held in trust for a mandatory
period of three years on the employee’s behalf, during which period the employee is entitled to any dividends paid on such shares. The award
is subject to a non-market based condition. If an employee leaves the Lloyds Banking Group within this three-year period for other than a
‘good’ reason, all of the shares awarded will be forfeited.
On 25 March 2021, the Lloyds Banking Group made an award of 1,017 (2020: 676) shares to all eligible employees. The number of shares
awarded was 67,658,976 (2020: 45,612,424), with an average fair value of £0.42 (2020: £0.30) based on the market price at the date of award.
Matching shares
The Lloyds Banking Group undertakes to match shares purchased by employees up to the value of £45 per month; these matching shares are
held in trust for a mandatory period of three years on the employee’s behalf, during which period the employee is entitled to any dividends
paid on such shares. The award is subject to a non-market based condition: if an employee leaves within this three-year period for other than a
‘good’ reason, all of the matching shares are forfeited. Similarly, if the employees sell their purchased shares within three years, their matching
shares are forfeited.
The number of shares awarded relating to matching shares in 2021 was 46,621,026 (2020: 62,262,140), with an average fair value of £0.44 (2020:
£0.34), based on market prices at the date of award.
Fixed share awards
Fixed share awards were introduced in 2014 in order to ensure that total fixed remuneration is commensurate with role and to provide a
competitive reward package for certain Lloyds Banking Group employees, with an appropriate balance of fixed and variable remuneration, in
line with regulatory requirements. The fixed share awards are delivered in Lloyds Banking Group shares, released over five years with 20 per
cent being released each year following the year of award. From June 2020, the fixed share awards are released over three years with one third
being released each year following the year of award. The number of shares purchased in 2021 was 8,320,948 (2020: 13,975,993).
The fixed share award is not subject to any performance conditions, performance adjustment or clawback. On an employee leaving the Lloyds
Banking Group, there is no change to the timeline for which shares will become unrestricted.
Note 31: Related party transactions
Key management personnel
Key management personnel are those persons having authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of an
entity; the Group’s key management personnel are the members of the Lloyds Banking Group plc Group Executive Committee together with its
Non-Executive Directors.
The table below details, on an aggregated basis, key management personnel compensation:
2021
2020
£m
£m
Compensation
Salaries and other short-term benefits
5
6
Share-based payments
7
6
Total compensation
12
12
The aggregate of the emoluments of the directors was £5.3 million (2020: £5.9 million).
Aggregate company contributions in respect of key management personnel to defined contribution pension schemes were £nil (2020: £nil).
The total for the highest paid director (Sir António Horta-Osório) was £1,559,000 (2020: Juan Colombás: £2,085,000); this did not include any
gain on exercise of Lloyds Banking Group plc shares in any year.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 30: Share-based payments (continued)
72
2021
2020
million
million
Share plans settled in Lloyds Banking Group plc shares
At 1 January
117
101
Granted, including certain adjustments (includes entitlements of appointed key management personnel)
19
46
Exercised/lapsed (includes entitlements of former key management personnel)
(62)
(30)
At 31 December
74
117
The tables below detail, on an aggregated basis, balances outstanding at the year end and related income and expense, together with
information relating to other transactions between the Group and its key management personnel:
2021
2020
£m
£m
Loans
At 1 January
2
2
Advanced (includes loans of appointed key management personnel)
1
At 31 December
3
2
The loans are on both a secured and unsecured basis and are expected to be settled in cash. The loans attracted interest rates of between 0.39
per cent and 22.93 per cent in 2021 (2020: 0.39 per cent and 24.20 per cent; 2019: 6.45 per cent and 24.20 per cent).
No provisions have been recognised in respect of loans given to key management personnel (2020 and 2019: £nil).
2021
2020
£m
£m
Deposits
At 1 January
11
23
Placed (includes deposits of appointed key management personnel)
26
26
Withdrawn (includes deposits of former key management personnel)
(26)
(38)
At 31 December
11
11
Deposits placed by key management personnel attracted interest rates of up to 1.0 per cent (2020: 2.0 per cent).
At 31 December 2021, the Group did not provide any guarantees in respect of key management personnel (2020: none).
At 31 December 2021, transactions, arrangements and agreements entered into by the Lloyds Banking Group and its banking subsidiaries with
Directors and connected persons included amounts outstanding in respect of loans and credit card transactions of £0.6 million with five
Directors and two connected persons (2020: £0.6 million with five Directors and two connected persons).
Balances and transactions with fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
Balances and transactions between members of the HBOS Group
In accordance with IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements, transactions and balances between the Company and its subsidiary
undertakings, and between those subsidiary undertakings, have all been eliminated on consolidation and thus are not reported as related party
transactions of the Group.
The Company, as a result of its position as parent of a banking group, has a large number of transactions with various of its subsidiary
undertakings; these are included on the balance sheet of the Company as follows:
2021
2020
£m
£m
Assets, included within:
Derivative financial instruments
163
221
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
384
2,194
Financial assets at amortised cost: due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
2,655
7,245
Liabilities, included within:
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
1,879
8,414
Derivative financial instruments
80
112
Subordinated liabilities
246
246
Due to the size and volume of transactions passing through these accounts, it is neither practical nor meaningful to disclose information on
gross inflows and outflows. During 2021 the Company earned interest income on the above asset balances of £170 million (2020: £222 million)
and incurred interest expense on the above liability balances of £78 million (2020: £139 million).
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 31: Related party transactions (continued)
73
Balances and transactions with Lloyds Banking Group plc and fellow subsidiaries of the Lloyds Banking Group
The Company and its subsidiaries have balances due to and from the Company’s ultimate parent company, Lloyds Banking Group plc and
fellow subsidiaries of the Lloyds Banking Group. These are included on the balance sheet as follows:
The Group
2021
2020
£m
£m
Assets, included within:
Derivative financial instruments
2,331
4,707
Financial assets at amortised cost: due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
15,181
19,852
Liabilities, included within:
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
74,789
86,954
Derivative financial instruments
3,469
7,154
Debt securities in issue
3,387
1,215
Subordinated liabilities
1,565
1,062
Due to the size and volume of transactions passing through these accounts, it is neither practical nor meaningful to disclose information on
gross inflows and outflows. During 2021 the Group earned £58 million and the Company earned £nil interest income on the above asset
balances (2020: Group £273 million, Company £nil); the Group incurred £1,466 million and the Company incurred £nil interest expense on the
above liability balances (2020: Group £1,625 million, Bank £nil).
Other related party transactions
Pension funds
At 31 December 2021, customer deposits of £144 million (2020: £43 million) related to the HBOS Group’s pension funds.
Joint ventures and associates
At 31 December 2021 there were loans and advances to customers of £14 million (2020: £11 million) outstanding and balances within customer
deposits of £4 million (2020: £4 million) relating to joint ventures and associates.
Note 32: Contingent liabilities, commitments and guarantees
Interchange fees
With respect to multi-lateral interchange fees (MIFs), the Lloyds Banking Group is not involved in the ongoing litigation which involves the card
schemes Visa and Mastercard (as described below). However, the Group is a member/licensee of Visa and Mastercard and other card schemes.
The litigation in question is as follows:
Litigation brought by retailers against both Visa and Mastercard continues in the English Courts, in which retailers are seeking damages on
grounds that Visa and Mastercard's MIFs breached competition law (this includes a judgment of the Supreme Court in June 2020 upholding
the Court of Appeal's finding in 2018 that historic interchange arrangements of Mastercard and Visa infringed competition law)
Litigation brought on behalf of UK consumers in the English Courts against Mastercard
Any impact on the Group of the litigation against Visa and Mastercard remains uncertain at this time, such that it is not practicable for the
Group to provide an estimate of any potential financial effect. Insofar as Visa is required to pay damages to retailers for interchange fees set
prior to June 2016, contractual arrangements to allocate liability have been agreed between various UK banks (including the Lloyds Banking
Group) and Visa Inc, as part of Visa Inc’s acquisition of Visa Europe in 2016. These arrangements cap the maximum amount of liability to which
the Lloyds Banking Group may be subject and this cap is set at the cash consideration received by the Lloyds Banking Group for the sale of its
stake in Visa Europe to Visa Inc in 2016. In 2016, the Lloyds Banking Group received Visa preference shares as part of the consideration for the
sale of its shares in Visa Europe. In 2020, some of these Visa preference shares were converted into Visa Inc Class A common stock (in
accordance with the provisions of the Visa Europe sale documentation) and they were subsequently sold by the Lloyds Banking Group. The sale
has no impact on this contingent liability.
LIBOR and other trading rates
Certain Lloyds Banking Group companies, together with other panel banks, have been named as defendants in ongoing private lawsuits,
including purported class action suits, in the US in connection with their roles as panel banks contributing to the setting of US Dollar, Japanese
Yen and Sterling London Interbank Offered Rate and the Australian BBSW reference rate.
Certain Lloyds Banking Group companies are also named as defendants in (i) UK-based claims; and (ii) two Dutch class actions, raising LIBOR
manipulation allegations. A number of the claims against the Lloyds Banking Group in the UK relating to the alleged mis-sale of interest rate
hedging products also include allegations of LIBOR manipulation.
It is currently not possible to predict the scope and ultimate outcome on the Lloyds Banking Group of any private lawsuits or any related
challenges to the interpretation or validity of any of the Lloyds Banking Group's contractual arrangements, including their timing and scale. As
such, it is not practicable to provide an estimate of any potential financial effect.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 31: Related party transactions (continued)
74
Tax authorities
The Lloyds Banking Group has an open matter in relation to a claim for group relief of losses incurred in its former Irish banking subsidiary,
which ceased trading on 31 December 2010. In 2013, HMRC informed the Lloyds Banking Group that its interpretation of the UK rules means
that the group relief is not available. In 2020, HMRC concluded their enquiry into the matter and issued a closure notice. The Lloyds Banking
Group's interpretation of the UK rules has not changed and hence it has appealed to the First Tier Tax Tribunal, with a hearing expected in
2022. If the final determination of the matter by the judicial process is that HMRC’s position is correct, management estimate that this would
result in an increase in current tax liabilities of the Group of approximately £380 million (including interest). The Lloyds Banking Group, having
taken appropriate advice, does not consider that this is a case where additional tax will ultimately fall due.
There are a number of other open matters on which the Lloyds Banking Group is in discussions with HMRC (including the tax treatment of
certain costs arising from the divestment of TSB Banking Group plc), none of which is expected to have a material impact on the financial
position of the Group.
Other legal actions and regulatory matters
In addition, during the ordinary course of business the Group is subject to other complaints and threatened or actual legal proceedings
(including class or group action claims) brought by or on behalf of current or former employees, customers, investors or other third parties, as
well as legal and regulatory reviews, challenges, investigations and enforcement actions, which could relate to a number of issues, including
financial, environmental or other regulatory matters, both in the UK and overseas. Where material, such matters are periodically reassessed, with
the assistance of external professional advisers where appropriate, to determine the likelihood of the Group incurring a liability. In those
instances where it is concluded that it is more likely than not that a payment will be made, a provision is established based on management's
best estimate of the amount required at the relevant balance sheet date. In some cases it will not be possible to form a view, for example
because the facts are unclear or because further time is needed to assess properly the merits of the case, and no provisions are held in relation
to such matters. In these circumstances, specific disclosure in relation to a contingent liability will be made where material. However, the Group
does not currently expect the final outcome of any such case to have a material adverse effect on its financial position, operations or cash flows.
Where there is a contingent liability related to an existing provision the relevant disclosures are included within note 24.
Contingent liabilities, commitments and guarantees
The Group
2021
2020
£m
£m
Contingent liabilities
263
207
The contingent liabilities of the Group arise in the normal course of banking business and it is not practicable to quantify their future financial
effect.
The Group
2021
2020
£m
£m
Commitments and guarantees
Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions
1
Forward asset purchases and forward deposits placed
6
28
Undrawn formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend:
Less than 1 year original maturity:
Mortgage offers made
16,147
17,828
Other commitments and guarantees
24,794
26,203
40,941
44,031
1 year or over original maturity
3,061
3,512
Total commitments and guarantees
44,008
47,572
Of the amounts shown above in respect of undrawn formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend, £18,740 million (2020:
£20,919 million) for the Group were irrevocable.
Capital commitments
There was no capital expenditure contracted but not provided for at 31 December 2021 (2020: £nil).
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 32: Contingent liabilities, commitments and guarantees (continued)
75
(1)Measurement basis of financial assets and liabilities
The accounting policies in note 2 describe how different classes of financial instruments are measured, and how income and expenses,
including fair value gains and losses, are recognised. The following table analyses the carrying amounts of the financial assets and liabilities by
category and by balance sheet heading.
Derivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
Mandatorily held at
fair value through
profit or loss
Designated
at fair value
through profit
or loss
At fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Held at
amortised
cost
Total
Held for
trading
Other
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2021
Financial assets
Cash and balances at central banks
3,201
3,201
Items in the course of collection from
banks
47
47
Financial assets at fair value through
profit or loss
362
362
Derivative financial instruments
280
3,904
4,184
Loans and advances to banks
102
102
Loans and advances to customers
279,409
279,409
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking
Group undertakings
15,181
15,181
Financial assets at amortised cost
294,692
294,692
Financial assets at fair value through
other comprehensive income
2,179
2,179
Total financial assets
280
3,904
362
2,179
297,940
304,665
Financial liabilities
Deposits from banks and repurchase
agreements
30,625
30,625
Customer deposits
170,777
170,777
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group
undertakings
74,789
74,789
Items in course of transmission to banks
98
98
Financial liabilities at fair value through
profit or loss
33
33
Derivative financial instruments
48
4,109
4,157
Notes in circulation
1,321
1,321
Debt securities in issue
7,353
7,353
Other
627
627
Subordinated liabilities
2,562
2,562
Total financial liabilities
48
4,109
33
288,152
292,342
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 33: Financial instruments
76
Derivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
Mandatorily held at
fair value through
profit or loss
Designated
at fair value
through profit
or loss
At fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Held at
amortised
cost
Total
Held for
trading
Other
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2020
Financial assets
Cash and balances at central banks
2,841
2,841
Items in the course of collection from
banks
42
42
Financial assets at fair value through
profit or loss
477
477
Derivative financial instruments
1,416
5,894
7,310
Loans and advances to banks
225
225
Loans and advances to customers
263,766
263,766
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking
Group undertakings
19,852
19,852
Financial assets at amortised cost
283,843
283,843
Financial assets at fair value through
other comprehensive income
2,525
2,525
Total financial assets
1,416
5,894
477
2,525
286,726
297,038
Financial liabilities
Deposits from banks and repurchase
agreements
14,695
14,695
Customer deposits
163,001
163,001
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group
undertakings
86,954
86,954
Items in course of transmission to banks
98
98
Financial liabilities at fair value through
profit or loss
45
45
Derivative financial instruments
998
7,454
8,452
Notes in circulation
1,305
1,305
Debt securities in issue
8,297
8,297
Other
699
699
Subordinated liabilities
2,853
2,853
Total financial liabilities
998
7,454
45
277,902
286,399
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 33: Financial instruments (continued)
77
Derivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
Mandatorily held at
fair value through
profit or loss
Held at
amortised
cost
Total
Held for
trading
Other
The Company
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2021
Financial assets
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
384
384
Derivative financial instruments
81
82
163
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
2,655
2,655
Total financial assets
81
82
384
2,655
3,202
Financial liabilities
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
1,879
1,879
Derivative financial instruments
80
80
Subordinated liabilities
1,208
1,208
Total financial liabilities
80
3,087
3,167
At 31 December 2020
Financial assets
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
2,194
2,194
Derivative financial instruments
105
113
218
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
7,245
7,245
Total financial assets
105
113
2,194
7,245
9,657
Financial liabilities
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
8,414
8,414
Derivative financial instruments
109
109
Subordinated liabilities
1,504
1,504
Total financial liabilities
109
9,918
10,027
(2)Fair value measurement
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants
at the measurement date. It is a measure as at a specific date and may be significantly different from the amount which will actually be paid or
received on maturity or settlement date.
Wherever possible, fair values have been calculated using unadjusted quoted market prices in active markets for identical instruments held by
the Group. Where quoted market prices are not available, or are unreliable because of poor liquidity, fair values have been determined using
valuation techniques which, to the extent possible, use market observable inputs, but in some cases use non-market observable inputs.
Valuation techniques used include discounted cash flow analysis and pricing models and, where appropriate, comparison to instruments with
characteristics similar to those of the instruments held by the Group. The Group measures valuation adjustments for its derivative exposures on
the same basis as the derivatives are managed.
The carrying amount of the following financial instruments is a reasonable approximation of fair value: cash and balances at central banks, items
in the course of collection from banks, items in course of transmission to banks and notes in circulation.
Because a variety of estimation techniques are employed and significant estimates made, comparisons of fair values between financial
institutions may not be meaningful. Readers of these financial statements are thus advised to use caution when using this data to evaluate the
Group’s financial position.
Fair value information is not provided for items that are not financial instruments or for other assets and liabilities which are not carried at fair
value in the Group’s consolidated balance sheet. These items include intangible assets, premises and equipment, and shareholders’ equity.
These items are material and accordingly the Group believes that any fair value information presented would not represent the underlying value
of the Group.
Valuation control framework
The key elements of the control framework for the valuation of financial instruments include model validation, product implementation review
and independent price verification. These functions are carried out by appropriately skilled risk and finance teams, independent of the business
area responsible for the products.
Model validation covers both qualitative and quantitative elements relating to new models. In respect of new products, a product
implementation review is conducted pre and post-trading. Pre-trade testing ensures that the new model is integrated into the Group’s systems
and that the profit and loss and risk reporting are consistent throughout the trade lifecycle. Post-trade testing examines the explanatory power
of the implemented model, actively monitoring model parameters and comparing in-house pricing to external sources. Independent price
verification procedures cover financial instruments carried at fair value. The frequency of the review is matched to the availability of independent
data, monthly being the minimum. Valuation differences in breach of established thresholds are escalated to senior management. The results
from independent pricing and valuation reserves are reviewed monthly by senior management.
Formal committees, consisting of senior risk, finance and business management, meet at least quarterly to discuss and approve valuations in
more judgemental areas, in particular for structured credit, over-the-counter options and the credit valuation adjustment (CVA), funding
valuation adjustment (FVA) and other valuation adjustments.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 33: Financial instruments (continued)
78
Valuation of financial assets and liabilities
Assets and liabilities carried at fair value or for which fair values are disclosed have been classified into three levels according to the quality and
reliability of information used to determine the fair values.
Level 1
Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities. Products
classified as level 1 predominantly comprise government securities.
Level 2
Level 2 valuations are those where quoted market prices are not available, for example where the instrument is traded in a market that is not
considered to be active or valuation techniques are used to determine fair value and where these techniques use inputs that are based
significantly on observable market data. Examples of such financial instruments include most over-the-counter derivatives, financial institution
issued securities, certificates of deposit and certain asset-backed securities.
Level 3
Level 3 portfolios are those where at least one input which could have a significant effect on the instrument’s valuation is not based on
observable market data. Certain of the Group’s asset-backed securities and derivatives, principally where there is no trading activity in such
securities, are classified as level 3.
Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio arise when inputs that could have a significant impact on the instrument’s valuation become market
observable after previously having been non-market observable. In the case of asset-backed securities this can arise if more than one consistent
independent source of data becomes available. Conversely, transfers into the portfolio arise when consistent sources of data cease to be
available.
(3)Financial assets and liabilities carried at fair value
(A)Financial assets, excluding derivatives
Valuation hierarchy
At 31 December 2021, the Group’s financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives, totalled £2,541 million (2020: £3,002 million). The
table below analyses these financial assets by balance sheet classification, asset type and valuation methodology (level 1, 2 or 3, as described on
page 79). The fair value measurement approach is recurring in nature. There were no significant transfers between level 1 and 2 during the year.
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Total
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2021
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Loans and advances to customers
362
362
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
Debt securities
Government securities
132
132
Corporate and other debt securities
2,047
2,047
132
2,047
2,179
Total financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives
132
2,047
362
2,541
At 31 December 2020
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Loans and advances to customers
477
477
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
Debt securities
Government securities
130
130
Corporate and other debt securities
2,395
2,395
130
2,395
2,525
Total financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives
130
2,395
477
3,002
At 31 December 2021, the Company had £384 million (2020: £2,194 million) of financial assets at fair value through profit or loss. The entire
balance was classified as level 2.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 33: Financial instruments (continued)
79
Movements in level 3 portfolio
The table below analyses movements in level 3 financial assets, excluding derivatives, carried at fair value (recurring measurement).
The Group
2021
2020
The Group
£m
£m
At 1 January
477
463
(Losses) gains recognised in the income statement within other income
(78)
16
Purchases/increases to customer loans
4
25
Sales/repayments of customer loans
(41)
(27)
At 31 December
362
477
(Losses) gains recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of
those assets held at 31 December
(68)
15
Valuation methodology for financial assets, excluding derivatives
Loans and advances to customers
The fair value of these assets is determined using discounted cash flow techniques. The discount rates are derived from market observable
interest rates, a risk margin that reflects loan credit ratings and an incremental illiquidity premium based on historical spreads at origination on
similar loans.
Debt securities
Debt securities measured at fair value and classified as level 2 are valued by discounting expected cash flows using an observable credit spread
applicable to the particular instrument.
Where there is limited trading activity in debt securities, the Group uses valuation models, consensus pricing information from third-party
pricing services and broker or lead manager quotes to determine an appropriate valuation. Debt securities are classified as level 3 if there is a
significant valuation input that cannot be corroborated through market sources or where there are materially inconsistent values for an input.
Asset classes classified as level 3 mainly comprise certain collateralised loan obligations and collateralised debt obligations.
(B)Financial liabilities, excluding derivatives
Valuation hierarchy
At 31 December 2021, the Group’s financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivatives, comprised its financial liabilities at fair value
through profit or loss and totalled £33 million (2020: £45 million). The table below analyses these financial liabilities by balance sheet
classification and valuation methodology (level 1, 2 or 3, as described on page 79). The fair value measurement approach is recurring in nature.
There were no significant transfers between level 1 and 2 during the year.
2021
2020
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Total
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Total
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Debt securities in issue designated at fair value
through profit or loss
33
33
45
45
Movements in level 3 portfolio
The table below analyses movements in the level 3 financial liabilities portfolio, excluding derivatives.
2021
2020
The Group
£m
£m
At 1 January
45
47
(Gains) losses recognised in the income statement within other income
(5)
1
Redemptions
(7)
(3)
At 31 December
33
45
(Gains) losses recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those
liabilities held at 31 December
(4)
1
(C)Derivatives
Valuation hierarchy
All of the Group’s derivative assets and liabilities are carried at fair value. At 31 December 2021, such assets totalled £4,184 million for the Group
(2020: £7,310 million for the Group) and liabilities totalled £4,157 million for the Group (2020: £8,452 million for the Group). The table below
analyses these derivative balances by valuation methodology (level 1, 2 or 3, as described on page 79). The fair value measurement approach is
recurring in nature. There were no significant transfers between level 1 and level 2 during the year.
2021
2020
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Total
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Total
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Derivative assets
4,184
4,184
7,298
12
7,310
Derivative liabilities
(3,981)
(176)
(4,157)
(8,181)
(271)
(8,452)
At 31 December 2021, the Company had derivative assets of £163 million (2020: £218 million) and derivative liabilities of £80 million (2020:
£109 million. These balances were classified as level 2.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 33: Financial instruments (continued)
80
Movements in level 3 portfolio
The table below analyses movements in level 3 derivative assets and liabilities carried at fair value.
2021
2020
Derivative
assets
Derivative
liabilities
Derivative
assets
Derivative
liabilities
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 1 January
12
(271)
(297)
(Losses) gains recognised in the income statement within other income
(12)
76
1
7
Redemptions
19
20
Transfers into the level 3 portfolio
11
(1)
At 31 December
(176)
12
(271)
Gains recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the
change in fair value of those assets or liabilities held at 31 December
69
1
7
Valuation methodology for derivatives
Where the Group’s derivative assets and liabilities are not traded on an exchange, they are valued using valuation techniques, including
discounted cash flow and options pricing models, as appropriate. The types of derivatives classified as level 2 and the valuation techniques used
include:
Interest rate swaps which are valued using discounted cash flow models; the most significant inputs into those models are interest rate yield
curves which are developed from publicly quoted rates
Foreign exchange derivatives that do not contain options which are priced using rates available from publicly quoted sources
Credit derivatives which are valued using standard models with observable inputs, except for the items classified as level 3, which are valued
using publicly available yield and credit default swap (CDS) curves
Less complex interest rate and foreign exchange option products which are valued using volatility surfaces developed from publicly
available interest rate cap, interest rate swaption and other option volatilities; option volatility skew information is derived from a market
standard consensus pricing service. For more complex option products, the Group calibrates its models using observable at-the-money
data; where necessary, the Group adjusts for out-of-the-money positions using a market standard consensus pricing service
Complex interest rate and foreign exchange products where inputs to the valuation are significant, material and unobservable are classified as
level 3.
Where credit protection, usually in the form of credit default swaps, has been purchased or written on asset-backed securities, the security is
referred to as a negative basis asset-backed security and the resulting derivative assets or liabilities have been classified as either level 2 or level
3 according to the classification of the underlying asset-backed security.
Certain unobservable inputs used to calculate CVA, FVA, and own credit adjustments, are not significant in determining the classification of the
derivative and debt instruments. Consequently, these inputs do not form part of the level 3 sensitivities presented.
Derivative valuation adjustments
Derivative financial instruments which are carried in the balance sheet at fair value are adjusted where appropriate to reflect credit risk, market
liquidity and other risks.
(i)Uncollateralised derivative valuation adjustments
The following table summarises the movement on this valuation adjustment account during 2020 and 2021:
2021
2020
£m
£m
At 1 January
120
102
Income statement charge (credit)
(32)
18
At 31 December
88
120
Represented by:
2021
2020
£m
£m
Credit Valuation Adjustment
73
97
Debit Valuation Adjustment
(3)
(3)
Funding Valuation Adjustment
18
26
88
120
Credit and Debit Valuation Adjustments (CVA and DVA) are applied to the Group’s over-the-counter derivative exposures with counterparties
that are not subject to strong interbank collateral arrangements. These exposures largely relate to the provision of risk management solutions
for corporate customers.
A CVA is taken where the Group has a positive future uncollateralised exposure (asset). A DVA is taken where the Group has a negative future
uncollateralised exposure (liability). These adjustments reflect interest rates and expectations of counterparty creditworthiness and the Group’s
own credit spread respectively.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 33: Financial instruments (continued)
81
The CVA is sensitive to:
The current size of the mark-to-market position on the uncollateralised asset
Expectations of future market volatility of the underlying asset
Expectations of counterparty creditworthiness
Market Credit Default Swap (CDS) spreads are used to develop the probability of default for quoted counterparties. For unquoted
counterparties, internal credit ratings and market sector CDS curves and recovery rates are used. The loss given default (LGD) is based on
market recovery rates and internal credit assessments.
The combination of a one-notch deterioration in the credit rating of derivative counterparties and a ten per cent increase in LGD increases the
CVA by £18 million. Current market value is used to estimate the projected exposure for products not supported by the model, which are
principally complex interest rate options that are traded in very low volumes. For these, the CVA is calculated on an add-on basis (although no
such adjustment was required at 31 December 2021).
The DVA is sensitive to:
The current size of the mark-to-market position on the uncollateralised liability
Expectations of future market volatility of the underlying liability
The Group’s own CDS spread
A one per cent rise in the CDS spread would lead to an increase in the DVA of £6 million.
The risk exposures that are used for the CVA and DVA calculations are strongly influenced by interest rates. Due to the nature of the Group’s
business the CVA/DVA exposures tend to be on average the same way around such that the valuation adjustments fall when interest rates rise.
A one per cent rise in interest rates would lead to a £23 million fall in the overall valuation adjustment to £47 million. The CVA model used by
the Group does not assume any correlation between the level of interest rates and default rates.
The Group has also recognised a Funding Valuation Adjustment to adjust for the net cost of funding uncollateralised derivative positions. This
adjustment is calculated on the expected future exposure discounted at a suitable cost of funds. A ten basis points increase in the cost of funds
will increase the funding valuation adjustment by £3 million.
(ii)Market liquidity
The Group includes mid to bid-offer valuation adjustments against the expected cost of closing out the net market risk in the Group’s trading
positions within a time frame that is consistent with historical trading activity and spreads that the trading desks have accessed historically
during the ordinary course of business in normal market conditions.
At 31 December 2021, the Group’s derivative trading business held mid to bid-offer valuation adjustments of £2 million (2020: £4 million).
(D)Sensitivity of level 3 valuations
2021
2020
Effect of reasonably possible
alternative assumptions2
Effect of reasonably possible
alternative assumptions2
Valuation
techniques
Significant
unobservable
inputs1
Carrying
value
Favourable
changes
Unfavourable
changes
Carrying
value
Favourable
changes
Unfavourable
changes
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Loans and
advances to
customers
Discounted cash
flows
Interest rate
spreads (bps) (+/-
50bps)3
362
31
(29)
477
36
(34)
Derivative financial assets
Interest rate
derivatives
Option pricing
model
Interest rate
volatility (n/a)4
12
Level 3 financial assets carried at fair value
362
489
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
Securitisation
notes
Discounted cash
flows
Interest rate
spreads (+/-
50bps)5
33
1
(1)
45
1
(1)
Derivative financial liabilities
Shared
appreciation
right
Market values –
property valuation
HPI (+/- 1%)6
176
19
(18)
271
24
(22)
Level 3 financial liabilities carried at fair value
209
316
1Ranges are shown where appropriate and represent the highest and lowest inputs used in the level 3 valuations.
2Where the exposure to an unobservable input is managed on a net basis, only the net impact is shown in the table.
32020: -50bps/106bps
42020: 30%/60%
52020: +/- 50bps
62020: +/- 1%
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 33: Financial instruments (continued)
82
Unobservable inputs
Significant unobservable inputs affecting the valuation of debt securities and derivatives are as follows:
Interest rates and inflation rates are referenced in some derivatives where the payoff that the holder of the derivative receives depends on
the behaviour of those underlying references through time
Volatility parameters represent key attributes of option behaviour; higher volatilities typically denote a wider range of possible outcomes
Reasonably possible alternative assumptions
Valuation techniques applied to many of the Group’s level 3 instruments often involve the use of two or more inputs whose relationship is
interdependent. The calculation of the effect of reasonably possible alternative assumptions included in the table above reflects such
relationships.
(4)Financial assets and liabilities carried at amortised cost
(A)Financial assets
Valuation hierarchy
The table below analyses the fair values of the financial assets of the Group which are carried at amortised cost by valuation methodology (level
1, 2 or 3, as described on page 79). Financial assets carried at amortised cost are mainly classified as level 3 due to significant unobservable
inputs used in the valuation models. Where inputs are observable, debt securities are classified as level 1 or 2.
Carrying
value
Fair
value
Valuation hierarchy
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2021
Loans and advances to banks
102
102
102
Loans and advances to customers
279,409
282,369
282,369
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
15,181
15,181
15,181
At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to banks
225
225
225
Loans and advances to customers
263,766
265,635
265,635
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
19,852
19,852
19,852
Valuation methodology
Loans and advances to banks
The carrying value of short-dated loans and advances to banks is assumed to be their fair value. The fair value of loans and advances to banks is
estimated by discounting the anticipated cash flows at a market discount rate adjusted for the credit spread of the obligor or, where not
observable, the credit spread of borrowers of similar credit quality.
Loans and advances to customers
The Group provides loans and advances to commercial, corporate and personal customers at both fixed and variable rates. Due to their short-
term nature, the carrying value of the variable rate loans and those relating to lease financing is assumed to be their fair value.
To determine the fair value of loans and advances to customers, loans are segregated into portfolios of similar characteristics. A number of
techniques are used to estimate the fair value of fixed rate lending; these take account of expected credit losses based on historic trends,
prevailing market interest rates and expected future cash flows. For retail exposures, fair value is usually estimated by discounting anticipated
cash flows (including interest at contractual rates) at market rates for similar loans offered by the Group and other financial institutions. Certain
loans secured on residential properties are made at a fixed rate for a limited period, typically two to five years, after which the loans revert to the
relevant variable rate. The fair value of such loans is estimated by reference to the market rates for similar loans of maturity equal to the
remaining fixed interest rate period. The fair value of commercial loans is estimated by discounting anticipated cash flows at a rate which
reflects the effects of interest rate changes, adjusted for changes in credit risk.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 33: Financial instruments (continued)
83
(B)Financial liabilities
Valuation hierarchy
The table below analyses the fair values of the financial liabilities of the Group which are carried at amortised cost by valuation methodology
(level 1, 2 or 3, as described on page 79).
Carrying
value
Fair
value
Valuation hierarchy
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2021
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements
30,625
30,625
30,625
Customer deposits
170,777
170,842
170,842
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
74,789
74,789
74,789
Debt securities in issue
7,353
7,425
7,425
Subordinated liabilities
2,562
2,728
2,728
Repurchase agreements included in above amounts:
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements
30,028
30,028
30,028
At 31 December 2020
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements
14,695
14,695
14,695
Customer deposits
163,001
163,148
163,148
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
86,954
86,954
86,954
Debt securities in issue
8,297
8,622
8,622
Subordinated liabilities
2,853
3,096
3,096
Repurchase agreements included in above amounts:
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements
13,680
13,680
13,680
Valuation methodology
Deposits from banks and customer deposits
The fair value of bank and customer deposits repayable on demand is assumed to be equal to their carrying value.
The fair value for all other deposits is estimated using discounted cash flows applying either market rates, where applicable, or current rates for
deposits of similar remaining maturities.
Debt securities in issue
The fair value of short-term debt securities in issue is approximately equal to their carrying value. Fair value for other debt securities is calculated
based on quoted market prices where available. Where quoted market prices are not available, fair value is estimated using discounted cash
flow techniques at a rate which reflects market rates of interest and the Group’s own credit spread.
Subordinated liabilities
The fair value of subordinated liabilities is determined by reference to quoted market prices where available or by reference to quoted market
prices of similar instruments. Subordinated liabilities are classified as level 2, since the inputs used to determine their fair value are largely
observable.
Repurchase agreements
The carrying amount is deemed a reasonable approximation of fair value given the short-term nature of these instruments.
(5)Reclassifications of financial assets
There have been no reclassifications of financial assets in 2020 or 2021.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 33: Financial instruments (continued)
84
There were no significant transferred financial assets which were derecognised in their entirety, but with ongoing exposure. Details of
transferred financial assets that continue to be recognised in full are as follows.
The Group enters into repurchase and securities lending transactions in the normal course of business that do not result in derecognition of the
financial assets as substantially all of the risks and rewards, including credit, interest rate, prepayment and other price risks are retained by the
Group. In all cases, the transferee has the right to sell or repledge the assets concerned.
As set out in note 20, included within financial assets measured at amortised cost are loans transferred under the Group’s securitisation and
covered bond programmes. As the Group retains all or a majority of the risks and rewards associated with these loans, including credit, interest
rate, prepayment and liquidity risk, they remain on the Group’s balance sheet. Assets transferred into the Group’s securitisation and covered
bond programmes are not available to be used by the Group while the assets are within the programmes. However, the Group retains the right
to remove loans from the covered bond programmes where they are in excess of the programme’s requirements. In addition, where the Group
has retained some of the notes issued by securitisation and covered bond programmes, the Group has the ability to sell or pledge these
retained notes.
The table below sets out the carrying values of the transferred assets and the associated liabilities. For repurchase and securities lending
transactions, the associated liabilities represent the Group’s obligation to repurchase the transferred assets. For securitisation programmes, the
associated liabilities represent the external notes in issue (note 20). The liabilities shown in the table below have recourse to the transferred
assets.
2021
2020
Carrying
value of
transferred
assets
Carrying
value of
associated
liabilities
Carrying
value of
transferred
assets
Carrying
value of
associated
liabilities
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
Repurchase and securities lending transactions
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
24
37
Securitisation programmes
Financial assets at amortised cost:
Loans and advances to customers1
22,101
1,687
27,504
3,034
1The carrying value of associated liabilities for the Group excludes securitisation notes held by the Group of £19,037 million (31 December 2020: £23,199 million).
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 34: Transfers of financial assets
85
The following information relates to financial assets and liabilities which have been offset in the balance sheet and those which have not been
offset but for which the Group has enforceable master netting agreements or collateral arrangements in place with counterparties.
Related amounts where
set off in the balance
sheet not permitted2
Potential
net amounts
if offset
of related
amounts
permitted
Gross
amounts of
assets and
liabilities1
Amount
offset in
the balance
sheet
Net amounts
presented in
the balance
sheet
Cash
collateral
received/
pledged
Non-cash
collateral
received/
pledged
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2021
Financial assets
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
362
362
362
Derivative financial instruments
4,184
4,184
(712)
(350)
3,122
Loans and advances to banks
102
102
(42)
60
Loans and advances to customers
279,409
279,409
(12)
(305)
279,092
Financial assets at fair value through other
comprehensive income
2,179
2,179
2,179
Financial liabilities
Deposits from banks
597
597
(596)
1
Customer deposits
170,777
170,777
(116)
(305)
170,356
Repurchase agreements
30,028
30,028
(30,028)
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
33
33
33
Derivative financial instruments
4,157
4,157
(54)
(1,237)
2,866
At 31 December 2020
Financial assets
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
477
477
477
Derivative financial instruments
7,310
7,310
(1,394)
(621)
5,295
Loans and advances to banks
225
225
(17)
208
Loans and advances to customers
263,766
263,766
(229)
(606)
262,931
Financial assets at fair value through other
comprehensive income
2,525
2,525
2,525
Financial liabilities
Deposits from banks
1,015
1,015
(774)
241
Customer deposits
163,001
163,001
(620)
(606)
161,775
Repurchase agreements
13,680
13,680
(13,680)
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
45
45
45
Derivative financial instruments
8,452
8,452
(246)
(1,572)
6,634
1After impairment allowance.
2The Group enters into derivatives and repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements with various counterparties which are governed by industry standard master netting agreements. The
Group holds and provides cash and securities collateral in respective of derivative transactions covered by these agreements. The right to set off balances under these master netting
agreements or to set off cash and securities collateral only arises in the event of non-payment or default and, as a result, these arrangements do not qualify for offsetting under IAS 32.
The effects of over-collateralisation have not been taken into account in the above table.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 35: Offsetting of financial assets and liabilities
86
Financial instruments are fundamental to the Group’s activities and, as a consequence, the risks associated with financial instruments represent
a significant component of the risks faced by the Group.
The primary risks affecting the Group through its use of financial instruments are: market risk, which includes interest rate risk and foreign
exchange risk; credit risk; liquidity risk and capital risk. The following disclosures provide quantitative and qualitative information about the
Group’s exposure to these risks.
Market risk
(A)Interest rate risk
Interest rate risk arises from the different repricing characteristics of the assets and liabilities. Liabilities are either insensitive to interest rate
movements, for example interest free or very low interest customer deposits, or are sensitive to interest rate changes but bear rates which may
be varied at the Group’s discretion and that for competitive reasons generally reflect changes in the UK Bank Rate, set by the Bank of England.
The rates on the remaining deposits are contractually fixed for their term to maturity.
Many banking assets are sensitive to interest rate movements; there is a large volume of managed rate assets such as variable rate mortgages
which may be considered as a natural offset to the interest rate risk arising from the managed rate liabilities. However, a significant proportion
of the Group’s lending assets, for example many personal loans and mortgages, bear interest rates which are contractually fixed.
The Group’s risk management policy is to optimise reward while managing its market risk exposures within the risk appetite defined by the
Lloyds Banking Group Board. The largest residual risk exposure arises from balances that are deemed to be insensitive to changes in market
rates (including current accounts, a portion of variable rate deposits and investable equity), and is managed through the Lloyds Banking Group’s
structural hedge. The Lloyds Banking Group's structural hedge consists of longer-term fixed rate assets or interest rate swaps and the amount
and duration of the hedging activity is reviewed regularly by the Lloyds Banking Group Asset and Liability Committee.
The Lloyds Banking Group establishes hedge accounting relationships for interest rate risk using cash flow hedges and fair value hedges. The
Lloyds Banking Group is exposed to cash flow interest rate risk on its variable rate loans and deposits together with its floating rate
subordinated debt. The derivatives used to manage the Lloyds Banking Group structural hedge may be designated into cash flow hedges to
manage income statement volatility. The economic items related to the Lloyds Banking Group structural hedge, for example current accounts,
are not eligible hedged items under IAS 39 for inclusion into accounting hedge relationships. The Lloyds Banking Group is exposed to fair value
interest rate risk on its fixed rate customer loans, its fixed rate customer deposits and the majority of its subordinated debt, and to cash flow
interest rate risk on its variable rate loans and deposits together with its floating rate subordinated debt. The Lloyds Banking Group applies
netting between similar risks before applying hedge accounting.
Hedge ineffectiveness arises during the management of interest rate risk due to residual unhedged risk. Sources of ineffectiveness, which the
Group may decide to not fully mitigate, can include basis differences, timing differences and notional amount differences. The effectiveness of
accounting hedge relationships is assessed between the hedging derivatives and the documented hedged item, which can differ to the
underlying economically hedged item.
At 31 December 2021 the aggregate notional principal of interest rate swaps designated as fair value hedges was £2,823 million (2020:
£4,938 million) for the Group with a net fair value asset of £232 million (2020: asset of £558 million) for the Group (note 12). There were losses
recognised on the hedging instruments of £190 million (2020: losses of £42 million) for the Group. There were gains on the hedged items
attributable to the hedged risk of £193 million (2020: gains of £42 million) for the Group. The gains and losses relating to the fair value hedges
are recorded in net trading income.
The notional principal of the interest rate swaps designated as cash flow hedges at 31 December 2021 was £nil (2020: £9,993 million) for the
Group with a net fair value asset of £nil (2020: liability of £140 million) for the Group (note 12). In 2021, ineffectiveness recognised in the income
statement that arises from cash flow hedges was a loss of £3 million (2020: £nil).
Interest Rate Benchmark Reform
During 2021, the Group has continued to manage the transition to alternative benchmark rates under its Group-wide IBOR transition
programme including delivery of the core changes required to its technology and business processes. Through this programme, the Group has
ensured that the most appropriate benchmark rate is used for new products, has transitioned the vast majority of its legacy products to new
benchmark rates for IBORs ceasing immediately after 31 December 2021 and has managed the impacts and risks relating to systems, processes,
accounting and reporting. The Group does not expect material changes to its risk management approach and strategy as a result of interest
rate benchmark reform.
The material risks identified include the following:
Conduct and litigation risk. The Group may be exposed to conduct and litigation charges as a direct result of inappropriate or negligent actions
taken during IBOR transition resulting in detriment to the customer. The Group is working closely with its counterparties to avoid this outcome.
Market risk. IBOR transition is expected to lead to changes in the Group’s market risk profile which will continue to be monitored and managed
within the appropriate risk appetites. The key change is expected to be on the management of basis risk profile during the period when
alternative benchmark rates are referenced in contracts up to the cessation of the in-scope IBOR index.
Credit risk. Clients may wish to renegotiate the terms of existing transactions as a consequence of IBOR reform. This could lead to a change in
the credit risk exposure of the client depending on the outcome of the negotiations. The Group will continue to monitor and manage changes
within the appropriate risk appetites.
Accounting risk. If IBOR transition is finalised in a manner that does not permit the application of the reliefs introduced in the IFRS Phase 2
amendments, the financial instrument may be required to be derecognised and a new instrument recognised. In addition, where instruments
used in hedge accounting relationships are transitioned either at different times or to different benchmarks, this may result in additional
volatility to the income statement either through hedge accounting ineffectiveness or failure of the hedge accounting relationships.
Operational risk. Additional operational risks may arise due to the IBOR transition programme impacting all businesses and functions within the
Group and leading to the implementation of changes to technology, operations, client communication and the valuation of in-scope financial
instruments.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 36: Financial risk management
87
At 31 December 2021, the Group had successfully transitioned all derivative products settled though the London Clearing House (LCH) that
were dependent on Sterling, Euro, Japanese Yen and Swiss Franc LIBOR to alternative benchmark rates and has transitioned the majority of its
commercial lending contracts from Sterling LIBOR to alternative benchmark rates. US Dollar LIBOR is not expected to cease before 30 June
2023 and the Group continues to work on its planned transition to alternative benchmark rates for those financial contracts currently referencing
US dollar LIBOR.
At 31 December 2021, the Group had the following significant exposures impacted by interest rate benchmark reform which have yet to
transition to the replacement benchmark rate:
The Group
Sterling
LIBOR
US Dollar
LIBOR
Other
LIBOR
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
Non-derivative financial assets
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
98
98
Loans and advances to customers
404
23
427
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
7
127
134
Financial assets at amortised cost
411
150
561
509
150
659
Non-derivative financial liabilities
Debt securities in issue
23
23
Derivative notional/contract amount
Interest rate
2,860
1,092
10
3,962
Cross currency
1,716
1,716
At 31 December 2021, the Company had no significant exposures impacted by interest rate benchmark reform which have yet to transition to
the replacement benchmark rate.
As at 31 December 2021, the Sterling LIBOR balances in the above table relate to contracts that have not converted to a risk-free rate. The
balance includes both contracts that mature in 2022 with further LIBOR interest rate fixings in the period and contracts where the counterparty
has not yet agreed to fallback provisions that would have effect when LIBOR ceases. In both cases, these contracts will have both cash flows and
valuations determined on a ‘synthetic’ LIBOR basis for reporting periods during 2022, unless they are transitioned to alternative benchmark
rates.
In respect of the Group's hedge accounting relationships, for the purposes of determining whether:
A forecast transaction is highly probable
Hedged future cash flows are expected to occur
A hedge is expected to be highly effective in achieving offsetting changes in fair value or cash flows attributable to the hedged risk
An accounting hedging relationship should be discontinued because of a failure of the retrospective effectiveness test
the Group assumes that the interest rate benchmark on which the hedged risk or the cash flows of the hedged item or hedging instrument are
based is not altered by uncertainties resulting from interest rate benchmark reform. In addition, for a fair value hedge of a non-contractually
specified benchmark portion of interest rate risk, the Group assesses only at inception of the hedge relationship and not on an ongoing basis
that the risk is separately identifiable and hedge effectiveness can be measured. The Group’s most significant hedge accounting relationships
are exposed to the following interest rate benchmarks: Sterling LIBOR, US Dollar LIBOR and EURIBOR.
At 31 December 2021, the Group expects that EURIBOR will continue to exist as a benchmark rate for the foreseeable future. Accordingly, the
Group does not consider its fair value or cash flow hedges of the EURIBOR benchmark interest rate to be directly affected by interest rate
benchmark reform and as a result does not anticipate changing the hedged risk to a different benchmark.
The notional amount of the hedged items that the Group has designated into cash flow hedge relationships that is directly affected by the
interest rate benchmark reform is £nil for the Group and £nil for the Company (2020: £3,498 million for the Group and £nil for the Company, of
which £3,471 million for the Group and £nil for the Company related to Sterling LIBOR; principally loans and advances to commercial and
corporate customers).
The interest rate benchmark reforms also affect assets designated in fair value hedges with a notional amount of £nil for the Group and £nil for
the Company (2020: £610 million for the Group and £nil for the Company, of which £603 million for the Group and £nil for the Company was in
respect of Sterling LIBOR), and liabilities designated in fair value hedges with a notional amount of £223 million for the Group and £nil for the
Company in respect of US Dollar LIBOR only (2020: £1,060 million for the Group and £8 million for the Company, of which £718 million for the
Group and £8 million for the Company was in respect of Sterling LIBOR). These fair value hedges principally relate to debt securities in issue.
At 31 December 2021, the notional amount of the hedging instruments in hedging relationships to which these amendments apply was £nil for
the Group and £nil for the Company (2020: £11,476 million for the Group and £5 million for the Company, of which £1,130 million for the Group
and £5 million for the Company related to Sterling LIBOR fair value hedges and £9,895 million for the Group and £nil for the Company related
to Sterling LIBOR cash flow hedges).
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 36: Financial risk management (continued)
88
(B)Foreign exchange risk
The corporate and retail businesses incur foreign exchange risk in the course of providing services to their customers. All non-structural foreign
exchange exposures in the non-trading book are managed centrally within allocated exposure limits. Trading book exposures in the authorised
trading centres are allocated exposure limits. The limits are monitored daily by the local centres and reported to the central market and liquidity
risk function in London.
The Group manages foreign currency accounting exposure via cash flow hedge accounting, utilising currency swaps and forward foreign
exchange trades.
Risk arises from the Group’s investments in its overseas operations. The Group’s structural foreign currency exposure is represented by the net
asset value of the foreign currency equity and subordinated debt investments in its subsidiaries and branches. Gains or losses on structural
foreign currency exposures are taken to reserves. The Group ceased all hedge accounting of the currency translation risk of the net investment
in foreign operations in 2018.
The Group has overseas operations in Europe. Structural foreign currency exposures in respect of operations with a Euro functional currency are
£119 million (2020: £73 million) for the Group.
Credit risk
The Group’s credit risk exposure arises in respect of the instruments below and predominantly in the United Kingdom. Credit risk appetite is set
at Board level and is described and reported through a suite of metrics devised from a combination of accounting and credit portfolio
performance measures, which include the use of various credit risk rating systems as inputs and assess credit risk at a counterparty level using
three components: (i) the probability of default by the counterparty on its contractual obligations; (ii) the current exposures to the counterparty
and their likely future development, from which the Group derives the exposure at default; and (iii) the likely loss ratio on the defaulted
obligations, the loss given default. The Group uses a range of approaches to mitigate credit risk, including internal control policies, obtaining
collateral, using master netting agreements and other credit risk transfers, such as asset sales and credit derivatives based transactions.
(A)Maximum credit exposure
The maximum credit risk exposure of the Group in the event of other parties failing to perform their obligations is detailed below. No account is
taken of any collateral held and the maximum exposure to loss is considered to be the balance sheet carrying amount or, for non-derivative off-
balance sheet transactions and financial guarantees, their contractual nominal amounts.
The Group
2021
2020
Maximum
exposure
Offset1
Net
exposure
Maximum
exposure
Offset1
Net
exposure
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:
Loans and advances
362
362
477
477
Derivative financial instruments
4,184
(350)
3,834
7,310
(621)
6,689
Financial assets at amortised cost, net2:
Loans and advances to banks, net2
102
102
225
225
Loans and advances to customers, net2
279,409
(305)
279,104
263,766
(606)
263,160
279,511
(305)
279,206
263,991
(606)
263,385
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive
income
2,179
2,179
2,525
2,525
Off-balance sheet items:
Other items serving as direct credit substitutes
58
58
18
18
Performance bonds, including letters of credit, and
other transaction-related contingencies
205
205
189
189
Irrevocable commitments and guarantees
18,740
18,740
20,919
20,919
19,003
19,003
21,126
21,126
305,239
(655)
304,584
295,429
(1,227)
294,202
1Offset items comprise deposit amounts available for offset, and amounts available for offset under master netting arrangements, that do not meet the criteria under IAS 32 to enable loans
and advances and derivative assets respectively to be presented net of these balances in the financial statements.
2Amounts shown net of related impairment allowances.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 36: Financial risk management (continued)
89
(B)Concentrations of exposure
The Group’s management of concentration risk includes portfolio controls on certain industries, sectors and products to reflect risk appetite as
well as individual, customer and bank limit risk tolerances. Credit policies and appetite statements are aligned to the Lloyds Banking Group’s
risk appetite and restrict exposure to higher risk countries and potentially vulnerable sectors and asset classes. Exposures are monitored to
prevent both an excessive concentration of risk and single name concentrations. The Group’s largest credit limits are regularly monitored by the
Lloyds Banking Group Board Risk Committee and reported in accordance with regulatory requirements. As part of its credit risk policy, the
Group considers sustainability risk (which incorporates Environmental (including climate), Social and Governance) in the assessment of
commercial facilities.
At 31 December 2021 the most significant concentrations of exposure were in mortgages (comprising 94 per cent of total loans and advances to
customers) and in other personal lending (comprising 3 per cent of the total).
Loans and advances to customers
The Group
2021
2020
£m
£m
Agriculture, forestry and fishing
578
608
Energy and water supply
65
70
Manufacturing
240
273
Construction
693
973
Transport, distribution and hotels
2,473
3,019
Postal and telecommunications
97
159
Property companies
3,216
3,462
Financial, business and other services
1,197
1,627
Personal:
Mortgages
264,099
247,380
Other
8,870
8,973
Lease financing
213
235
Hire purchase
247
179
Total loans and advances to customers before allowance for impairment losses
281,988
266,958
Allowance for impairment losses (note 13)
(2,579)
(3,192)
Total loans and advances to customers
279,409
263,766
The Group’s operations are predominantly UK-based and as a result an analysis of credit risk exposures by geographical region is not provided.
(C)Credit quality of assets
Loans and advances
The Group uses two credit ratings systems, according to the characteristics of exposures and the way that they are managed internally; these
credit ratings are set out below. All probabilities of default (PDs) include forward-looking information and are based on 12-month values, with
the exception of credit-impaired.
RMS
CMS
Quality classification
IFRS 9 PD range
Quality classification
IFRS 9 PD range
RMS 1-6
0.00-4.50%
CMS 1-10
0.00-0.50%
RMS 7-9
4.51-14.00%
CMS 11-14
0.51-3.00%
RMS 10
14.01-20.00%
CMS 15-18
3.01-20.00%
RMS 11-13
20.01-99.99%
CMS 19
20.01-99.99%
RMS 14
100.00%
CMS 20-23
100.00%
Stage 3 assets of the Group include balances of £113 million (2020: £65 million) (with outstanding amounts due of £323 million (2020:
£288 million)) which have been subject to a partial write-off and where the Group continues to enforce recovery action.
Stage 2 and Stage 3 assets of the Group with a carrying amount of £612 million (2020: £14,900 million) were modified during the year. No
material gain or loss was recognised by the Group.
As at 31 December 2021 assets that had been previously modified while classified as Stage 2 or Stage 3 and were classified as Stage 1
amounted to £4,568 million (not material at 31 December 2020).
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 36: Financial risk management (continued)
90
Drawn exposures
Expected credit loss allowance
The Group - Gross drawn exposures and
expected credit loss allowance
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2021
Loans and advances to banks
CMS 1-10
102
102
CMS 11-14
CMS 15-18
CMS 19
CMS 20-23
102
102
Loans and advances to customers
RMS 1-6
243,740
19,528
263,268
113
373
486
RMS 7-9
784
3,578
4,362
27
164
191
RMS 10
8
588
596
1
43
44
RMS 11-13
11
1,876
1,887
182
182
RMS 14
4,041
4,041
665
665
244,543
25,570
4,041
274,154
141
762
665
1,568
CMS 1-10
2,503
1
2,504
1
1
CMS 11-14
2,797
361
3,158
8
7
15
CMS 15-18
162
453
615
2
37
39
CMS 19
2
35
37
4
4
CMS 20-23
1,520
1,520
712
712
5,464
850
1,520
7,834
11
48
712
771
Central adjustment
240
240
Total loans and advances to customers
250,007
26,420
5,561
281,988
392
810
1,377
2,579
The Group - Gross undrawn exposures and
expected credit loss allowance
Undrawn exposures
Expected credit loss allowance
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2021
Loans and advances to customers
RMS 1-6
38,202
1,542
39,744
23
19
42
RMS 7-9
107
85
192
2
3
5
RMS 10
15
15
1
1
RMS 11-13
28
28
2
2
RMS 14
44
44
38,309
1,670
44
40,023
25
25
50
CMS 1-10
3,196
3,196
CMS 11-14
569
149
718
1
3
4
CMS 15-18
10
59
69
1
1
CMS 19
CMS 20-23
2
2
1
1
3,775
208
2
3,985
1
4
1
6
Total loans and advances to customers
42,084
1,878
46
44,008
26
29
1
56
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 36: Financial risk management (continued)
91
Drawn exposures
Expected credit loss allowance
The Group - Gross drawn exposures and
expected credit loss allowance
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to banks
CMS 1-10
225
225
CMS 11-14
CMS 15-18
CMS 19
CMS 20-23
225
225
Loans and advances to customers
RMS 1-6
218,352
22,023
240,375
169
358
527
RMS 7-9
1,629
5,043
6,672
68
202
270
RMS 10
62
1,532
1,594
7
84
91
RMS 11-13
186
4,512
4,698
5
402
407
RMS 14
4,207
4,207
788
788
220,229
33,110
4,207
257,546
249
1,046
788
2,083
CMS 1-10
2,667
1
2,668
1
1
CMS 11-14
3,171
458
3,629
19
12
31
CMS 15-18
677
776
1,453
17
63
80
CMS 19
2
92
94
25
25
CMS 20-23
1,568
1,568
772
772
6,517
1,327
1,568
9,412
37
100
772
909
Central adjustment
200
200
Total loans and advances to customers
226,746
34,437
5,775
266,958
486
1,146
1,560
3,192
The Group - Gross undrawn exposures and
expected credit loss allowance
Undrawn exposures
Expected credit loss allowance
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to customers
RMS 1-6
40,170
1,853
42,023
39
29
68
RMS 7-9
323
230
553
8
11
19
RMS 10
7
32
39
3
3
RMS 11-13
1
59
60
12
12
RMS 14
41
41
40,501
2,174
41
42,716
47
55
102
CMS 1-10
3,389
3,389
1
1
CMS 11-14
796
359
1,155
4
4
8
CMS 15-18
97
179
276
2
6
8
CMS 19
30
30
4
4
CMS 20-23
6
6
6
6
4,282
568
6
4,856
7
14
6
27
Total loans and advances to customers
44,783
2,742
47
47,572
54
69
6
129
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 36: Financial risk management (continued)
92
Cash and balances at central banks
Significantly all of the Group’s cash and balances at central banks of £3,201 million (2020: £2,841 million) are due from the Bank of England.
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
The credit quality of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income is set out below:
2021
2020
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Debt securities:
Government securities
132
132
130
130
Corporate and other debt securities
2,003
44
2,047
2,342
53
2,395
Total financial assets at fair value through other
comprehensive income
2,135
44
2,179
2,472
53
2,525
1Credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’.
2Other comprises sub-investment grade (2021: £nil; 2020: £nil) and not rated (2021: £44 million; 2020: £53 million).
Derivative assets
An analysis of derivative assets is given in note 12. The Group reduces exposure to credit risk by using master netting agreements and by
obtaining collateral in the form of cash or highly liquid securities. In respect of the net credit risk relating to derivative assets of £3,834 million for
the Group (2020: £6,689 million for the Group), cash collateral of £712 million for the Group (2020: £1,394 million for the Group) was held and a
further £29 million for the Group (2020: £35 million for the Group) was due from OECD banks.
2021
2020
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
The Group
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Trading and other
1,141
693
1,834
1,639
861
2,500
Hedging
19
19
103
103
1,160
693
1,853
1,742
861
2,603
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
2,331
4,707
Total derivative financial instruments
4,184
7,310
1Credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’.
2Other comprises sub-investment grade (2021: £580 million; 2020: £834 million) and not rated (2021: £113 million; 2020: £27 million).
Financial guarantees and irrevocable loan commitments
Financial guarantees represent undertakings that the Group will meet a customer’s obligation to third parties if the customer fails to do so.
Commitments to extend credit represent unused portions of authorisations to extend credit in the form of loans, guarantees or letters of credit.
The Group is theoretically exposed to loss in an amount equal to the total guarantees or unused commitments, however, the likely amount of
loss is expected to be significantly less. Most commitments to extend credit are contingent upon customers maintaining specific credit
standards.
(D)Collateral held as security for financial assets
The principal types of collateral accepted by the Group include: residential and commercial properties; charges over business assets such as
premises, inventory and accounts receivable; financial instruments, cash and guarantees from third-parties. The terms and conditions associated
with the use of the collateral are varied and are dependent on the type of agreement and the counterparty. The Group holds collateral against
loans and advances and irrevocable loan commitments; qualitative and, where appropriate, quantitative information is provided in respect of
this collateral below. Collateral held as security for financial assets at fair value through profit or loss and for derivative assets is also shown
below.
The Group holds collateral in respect of loans and advances to banks and customers as set out below.
Loans and advances to banks
These transactions were generally conducted under terms that are usual and customary for standard secured lending activities.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 36: Financial risk management (continued)
93
Loans and advances to customers
Retail lending
Mortgages
An analysis by loan-to-value ratio of the Group's residential mortgage lending is provided below. The value of collateral used in determining the
loan-to-value ratios has been estimated based upon the last actual valuation, adjusted to take into account subsequent movements in house
prices, after making allowances for indexation error and dilapidations. The market takes into account many factors, including environmental
considerations such as flood risk and energy efficient additions, in arriving at the value of a home.
In some circumstances, where the discounted value of the estimated net proceeds from the liquidation of collateral (i.e. net of costs, expected
haircuts and anticipated changes in the value of the collateral to the point of sale) is greater than the estimated exposure at default, no credit
losses are expected and no ECL allowance is recognised.
2021
2020
The Group
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total gross
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total gross
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Less than 70 per cent
182,922
21,843
2,970
207,735
150,490
26,028
2,872
179,390
70 per cent to 80 per cent
40,313
1,722
325
42,360
40,234
3,555
439
44,228
80 per cent to 90 per cent
11,509
299
138
11,946
20,273
1,051
218
21,542
90 per cent to 100 per cent
718
109
79
906
468
178
103
749
Greater than 100 per cent
145
212
190
547
156
393
256
805
Total
235,607
24,185
3,702
263,494
211,621
31,205
3,888
246,714
Commercial lending
Stage 3 secured lending
The value of collateral is re-evaluated and its legal soundness re-assessed if there is observable evidence of distress of the borrower; this
evaluation is used to determine potential loss allowances and management’s strategy to try to either repair the business or recover the debt.
At 31 December 2021, Stage 3 secured commercial lending amounted to £429 million, net of an impairment allowance of £72 million (2020:
£495 million, net of an impairment allowance of £86 million). The fair value of the collateral held in respect of impaired secured commercial
lending was £73 million (2020: £162 million) for the Group. In determining the fair value of collateral, no specific amounts have been attributed
to the costs of realisation. For the purposes of determining the total collateral held by the Group in respect of impaired secured commercial
lending, the value of collateral for each loan has been limited to the principal amount of the outstanding advance in order to eliminate the
effects of any over-collateralisation and to provide a clearer representation of the Group’s exposure.
Stage 3 secured commercial lending and associated collateral relates to lending to property companies and to customers in the financial,
business and other services; transport, distribution and hotels; and construction industries.
Stage 1 and Stage 2 secured lending
For Stage 1 and Stage 2 secured commercial lending, the Group reports assets gross of collateral and therefore discloses the maximum loss
exposure. The Group believes that this approach is appropriate as collateral values at origination and during a period of good performance may
not be representative of the value of collateral if the obligor enters a distressed state.
Stage 1 and Stage 2 secured commercial lending is predominantly managed on a cash flow basis. On occasion, it may include an assessment of
underlying collateral, although, for Stage 3 lending, this will not always involve assessing it on a fair value basis. No aggregated collateral
information for the entire unimpaired secured commercial lending portfolio is provided to key management personnel.
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Securities held as collateral in the form of stock borrowed amounted to £3,025 million for the Group (2020: £12,283 million for the Group). Of
this amount, £424 million for the Group (2020: £12,283 million for the Group) had been resold or repledged as collateral for the Group’s own
transactions.
These transactions were generally conducted under terms that are usual and customary for standard secured lending activities.
Derivative assets, after offsetting of amounts under master netting arrangements
The Group reduces exposure to credit risk by using master netting agreements and by obtaining collateral in the form of cash or highly liquid
securities. In respect of the net derivative assets after offsetting of amounts under master netting arrangements of £3,834 million for the Group
(2020: £6,689 million for the Group), cash collateral of £712 million for the Group (2020: £1,394 million for the Group) was held.
Irrevocable loan commitments and other credit-related contingencies
At 31 December 2021, there were irrevocable loan commitments and other credit-related contingencies of £19,003 million for the Group (2020:
£21,126 million for the Group). Collateral is held as security, in the event that lending is drawn down, on £16,147 million for the Group (2020:
£17,828 million for the Group) of these balances.
Collateral repossessed
During the year, £80 million for the Group of collateral was repossessed (2020: £120 million for the Group), consisting primarily of residential
property. In respect of retail portfolios, the Group does not take physical possession of properties or other assets held as collateral and uses
external agents to realise the value as soon as practicable, generally at auction, to settle indebtedness. Any surplus funds are returned to the
borrower or are otherwise dealt with in accordance with appropriate insolvency regulations. In certain circumstances the Group takes physical
possession of assets held as collateral against commercial lending. In such cases, the assets are carried on the Group’s balance sheet and are
classified according to the Group’s accounting policies.
(E)Collateral pledged as security
The Group pledges assets primarily for repurchase agreements and securities lending transactions which are generally conducted under terms
that are usual and customary for standard securitised borrowing contracts.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 36: Financial risk management (continued)
94
Repurchase transactions
As at 31 December 2021 there were balances arising from repurchase transactions with banks of £30,028 million for the Group (2020:
£13,680 million for the Group), which include amounts due under the Bank of England's Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for
SMEs (TFSME); the fair value of the collateral provided under these agreements at 31 December 2021 was £39,875 million for the Group (2020:
£13,677 million for the Group).
Securities lending transactions
The following on-balance sheet financial assets have been lent to counterparties under securities lending transactions:
The Group
2021
2020
£m
£m
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
24
37
Securitisations and covered bonds
In addition to the assets detailed above, the Group also holds assets that are encumbered through the Group’s asset-backed conduits and its
securitisation and covered bond programmes. Further details of these assets are provided in note 20.
Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is defined as the risk that the Group has insufficient financial resources to meet its commitments as they fall due, or can only secure
them at excessive cost. Liquidity risk is managed through a series of measures, tests and reports that are primarily based on contractual
maturity. The Group carries out monthly stress testing of its liquidity position against a range of scenarios, including those prescribed by the
PRA. The Group’s liquidity risk appetite is also calibrated against a number of stressed liquidity metrics.
The table below analyses financial instrument liabilities of the Group on an undiscounted future cash flow basis according to contractual
maturity, into relevant maturity groupings based on the remaining period at the balance sheet date; balances with no fixed maturity are
included in the over 5 years category.
The Group’s liabilities may mature earlier or later than implied by their contractual terms and readers are, therefore, advised to use caution
when using this data to evaluate the Group’s liquidity position. In particular, amounts in respect of customer deposits are usually contractually
payable on demand or at short notice. However, in practice, these deposits are not usually withdrawn on their contractual maturity.
The Group
Up to 1
month
1-3
months
3-12
months
1-5
years
Over 5
years
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2021
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements
9
10
170
31,593
31,782
Customer deposits
163,248
550
2,996
4,266
5
171,065
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
33
33
Debt securities in issue
1
20
3,155
3,842
475
7,493
Lease liabilities
1
29
75
272
396
773
Subordinated liabilities
22
22
31
2,320
549
2,944
Total non-derivative financial liabilities
163,281
631
6,427
42,293
1,458
214,090
Derivative financial liabilities:
Gross settled derivatives – outflows
32
29
404
865
647
1,977
Gross settled derivatives – inflows
(10)
(18)
(400)
(838)
(639)
(1,905)
Gross settled derivatives – net flows
22
11
4
27
8
72
Net settled derivative liabilities
475
40
515
Total derivative financial liabilities
497
11
4
27
48
587
At 31 December 2020
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements
16
2
57
18,329
137
18,541
Customer deposits
151,762
2,680
4,030
4,705
12
163,189
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
45
45
Debt securities in issue
175
82
2,761
4,803
1,026
8,847
Lease liabilities
9
17
76
295
303
700
Subordinated liabilities
73
31
561
887
1,937
3,489
Total non-derivative financial liabilities
152,035
2,812
7,485
29,019
3,460
194,811
Derivative financial liabilities:
Gross settled derivatives – outflows
478
81
955
614
2,059
4,187
Gross settled derivatives – inflows
(391)
(21)
(936)
(619)
(2,256)
(4,223)
Gross settled derivatives – net flows
87
60
19
(5)
(197)
(36)
Net settled derivative liabilities
702
4
10
70
120
906
Total derivative financial liabilities
789
64
29
65
(77)
870
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 36: Financial risk management (continued)
95
The Company
Up to 1
month
1-3
months
3-12
months
1-5
years
Over 5
years
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2021
Subordinated liabilities
17
28
641
751
1,437
At 31 December 2020
Subordinated liabilities
18
184
744
686
1,632
The principal amount for undated subordinated liabilities with no redemption option is included within the over 5 years column; interest of
£7 million (2020: £7 million) per annum for the Group and £1 million (2020: £1 million) for the Company which is payable in respect of those
instruments for as long as they remain in issue is not included beyond 5 years.
The following table sets out the amounts and residual maturities of the Group's off-balance sheet contingent liabilities, commitments and
guarantees.
The Group
Within 1
year
1-3
years
3-5
years
Over 5
years
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2021
Total contingent liabilities
135
26
30
72
263
Lending commitments and guarantees
40,941
1,461
592
1,008
44,002
Other commitments
6
6
Total commitments and guarantees
40,941
1,461
592
1,014
44,008
Total contingents, commitments and guarantees
41,076
1,487
622
1,086
44,271
At 31 December 2020
Total contingent liabilities
94
9
104
207
Lending commitments and guarantees
44,032
2,144
453
914
47,543
Other commitments
1
16
12
29
Total commitments and guarantees
44,033
2,160
453
926
47,572
Total contingents, commitments and guarantees
44,127
2,169
453
1,030
47,779
Capital risk
Capital is actively managed on an ongoing basis for the Group's principal banking subsidiary, Bank of Scotland plc, and the associated capital
policies and procedures are subject to regular review. Bank of Scotland plc measures both its capital requirements and the amount of capital
resources that it holds to meet those requirements through applying capital directives and regulations as implemented in the UK by the
Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and supplemented through additional regulation under the PRA Rulebook and associated statements of
policy, supervisory statements and other guidance. Regulatory capital ratios are considered a key part of the budgeting and planning processes
and forecast ratios are reviewed by the Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Asset and Liability Committees. Target capital levels take
account of current and future regulatory requirements, capacity for growth and to cover uncertainties.
Note 37: Cash flow statements
(A)Change in operating assets
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Change in amounts due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
4,671
71,261
3,449
(535)
Change in other financial assets held at amortised cost
(15,266)
(6,659)
Change in financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
115
(14)
1,810
Change in derivative financial instruments
3,106
3,018
55
100
Change in other operating assets
158
4
1
Change in operating assets
(7,216)
67,610
5,315
(435)
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 36: Financial risk management (continued)
96
(B)Change in operating liabilities
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Change in deposits from banks and repurchase agreements
15,930
(1,777)
Change in customer deposits
7,776
11,154
Change in amounts due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
(12,165)
(71,044)
(6,535)
757
Change in financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
(12)
(2)
Change in derivative financial instruments
(4,295)
(2,582)
(29)
109
Change in debt securities in issue
(944)
(2,907)
Change in other operating liabilities1
(2)
(180)
(4)
6
Change in operating liabilities
6,288
(67,338)
(6,568)
872
1Includes £72 million (2020: £1 million) for the Group in respect of lease liabilities.
(C)Non-cash and other items
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Depreciation and amortisation
284
232
Dividends received from subsidiary undertakings
(1,200)
Revaluation of investment properties
20
Allowance for loan losses
(302)
1,547
Write-off of allowance for loan losses, net of recoveries
(320)
(454)
Impairment (credit) charge relating to undrawn balances
(72)
74
Regulatory and legal provisions
982
107
Other provision movements
3
68
Additional capital injections to subsidiaries
(36)
(33)
Net charge in respect of defined benefit schemes
113
117
112
115
Foreign exchange impact on balance sheet1
(15)
501
(40)
86
Interest expense on subordinated liabilities
99
184
73
133
Other non-cash items
(4)
(351)
47
(13)
Total non-cash items
768
2,045
(1,044)
288
Contributions to defined benefit schemes
(512)
(433)
(512)
(431)
Payments in respect of regulatory and legal provisions
(377)
(705)
Liability management
(7)
(263)
47
Total other items
(896)
(1,401)
(465)
(431)
Non-cash and other items
(128)
644
(1,509)
(143)
1When considering the movement on each line of the balance sheet, the impact of foreign exchange rate movements is removed in order to show the underlying cash impact.
(D)Analysis of cash and cash equivalents as shown in the balance sheet
The Group
The Company
2021
2020
2021
2020
£m
£m
£m
£m
Cash and balances at central banks
3,201
2,841
Less mandatory reserve deposits1
(2,355)
(2,143)
846
698
Loans and advances to banks
102
225
Less amounts with a maturity of three months or more
(74)
(58)
28
167
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group Undertakings
2,580
3,721
Total cash and cash equivalents
874
865
2,580
3,721
1Mandatory reserve deposits are held with local central banks in accordance with statutory requirements; these deposits are not available to finance the Group's day-to-day operations.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 37: Cash flow statements (continued)
97
HBOS plc is incorporated as a public limited company and registered in Scotland with the registered number SC218813. HBOS plc’s registered
office is The Mound, Edinburgh, EH1 1YZ, and its principal executive offices are located at 25 Gresham Street, London, EC2V 7HN.
HBOS plc and its subsidiaries form a leading UK-based financial services group, whose businesses provide a wide range of banking and financial
services.
HBOS plc’s immediate parent undertaking is Lloyds Bank plc and its ultimate parent undertaking and controlling party is Lloyds Banking Group
plc which is incorporated in Scotland. Copies of the consolidated annual report and accounts of Lloyds Banking Group plc may be obtained
from Lloyds Banking Group’s head office at 25 Gresham Street, London EC2V 7HN or downloaded via www.lloydsbankinggroup.com.
HBOS plc
Notes to the accounts
Note 38: Other information
98
In compliance with Section 409 of the Companies Act 2006, the
following comprises a list of all related undertakings of the Group, as
at 31 December 2021. The list includes each undertaking’s registered
office and the percentage of the class(es) of shares held by the
Group. All shares held are ordinary shares unless indicated otherwise
in the notes.
Subsidiary undertakings
The Group directly or indirectly holds 100 per cent of the share class
or a majority of voting rights (including where the undertaking does
not have share capital as indicated) in the following undertakings. All
material subsidiary undertakings are consolidated by Lloyds Banking
Group.
Anglo Scottish Utilities Partnership
+ *
Automobile Association Personal Finance Ltd
4 i
Bank of Scotland (B G S) Nominees Ltd
5 *
Bank of Scotland Branch Nominees Ltd
5 i
Bank of Scotland Central Nominees Ltd
5 *
Bank of Scotland Edinburgh Nominees Ltd
5 *
Bank of Scotland Equipment Finance Ltd (in liquidation)
9 i
Bank of Scotland plc
5 i v
Bank of Scotland Structured Asset Finance Ltd
1 i
Bank of Scotland Transport Finance 1 Ltd (in liquidation)
9 i
Bank of Wales Ltd
7 i
Barents Leasing Ltd
1 i
Birmingham Midshires Financial Services Ltd
4 i
Birmingham Midshires Land Development Ltd (in
liquidation)
9 i
Birmingham Midshires Mortgage Services Ltd (in
liquidation)
9 i
BOS (Ireland) Property Services 2 Ltd
8 i
BOS (Shared Appreciation Mortgages (Scotland) No. 2)
Ltd
4 i
BOS (Shared Appreciation Mortgages (Scotland) No. 3)
Ltd
4 i
BOS (Shared Appreciation Mortgages (Scotland)) Ltd
4 i
BOS (Shared Appreciation Mortgages) No. 1 plc
4 # i
BOS (Shared Appreciation Mortgages) No. 2 plc
4 # i
BOS (Shared Appreciation Mortgages) No. 3 plc
4 # i
BOS (Shared Appreciation Mortgages) No. 4 plc
4 # i
BOS (Shared Appreciation Mortgages) No. 5 plc
4 i
BOS (Shared Appreciation Mortgages) No. 6 plc
4 i
BOSSAF Rail Ltd
1 i
BOS Personal Lending Ltd
4 ii iii
British Linen Leasing (London) Ltd
5 i
British Linen Leasing Ltd
5 i
British Linen Shipping Ltd
5 i
Capital 1945 Ltd
7 i
Capital Bank Leasing 3 Ltd (in liquidation)
9 i
Capital Bank Leasing 5 Ltd
7 i
Capital Bank Leasing 12 Ltd
5 i
Capital Bank Property Investments (3) Ltd
7 i
Capital Personal Finance Ltd
4 i
CF Asset Finance Ltd (in liquidation)
9 i
First Retail Finance (Chester) Ltd
4 i
Forthright Finance Ltd
7 i
Halifax Group Ltd
4 i
Halifax Leasing (March No.2) Ltd
1 i
Halifax Leasing (September) Ltd
1 i
Halifax Ltd
4 i
Halifax Loans Ltd
4 i
Name of Undertaking
Notes
Halifax Mortgage Services Ltd (in liquidation)
9 i
Halifax Share Dealing Ltd
4 i
Halifax Vehicle Leasing (1998) Ltd
4 i
HBOS Covered Bonds LLP
4 *
HBOS Final Salary Trust Ltd
5 i
HBOS Social Housing Covered Bonds LLP
7 *
HBOS UK Ltd
5 i
Home Shopping Personal Finance Ltd
4 i
HSDL Nominees Ltd
4 i
IBOS Finance Ltd
7 i
Intelligent Finance Software Ltd
4 i
Lex Vehicle Leasing (Holdings) Ltd (in liquidation)
9 ii iii iv
Lex Vehicle Leasing Ltd (in liquidation)
9 i
Lloyds Capital GP Ltd
10 i
Lloyds Secretaries Ltd
1 i
Membership Services Finance Ltd
4 i
NFU Mutual Finance Ltd
7 ii vi #
Nordic Leasing Ltd (in liquidation)
9 i
NWS Trust Ltd
5 i
Pacific Leasing Ltd
1 i
Seabreeze Leasing Ltd
1 i
Seaspirit Leasing Ltd
1 i
Sharedealing Nominees Ltd
4 i
Standard Property Investment (1987) Ltd
5 ii iii
Sussex County Homes Ltd
4 i
The British Linen Company Ltd
5 i
The Mortgage Business plc
4 i
Thistle Leasing
+ *
Tower Hill Property Investments (7) Ltd
7 i #
Tower Hill Property Investments (10) Ltd
7 i #
Tranquility Leasing Ltd
1 i
Waymark Asset Investments Ltd
1 ii iii
Name of Undertaking
Notes
The Group has determined that it has the power to exercise control
over the following entities without having the majority of the voting
rights of the undertakings. Unless otherwise stated, the undertakings
do not have share capital or the Group does not hold any shares.
Addison Social Housing Holdings Ltd
2
Deva Financing Holdings Ltd
3
Deva Financing plc
3
Edgbaston RMBS 2010-1 plc
3
Edgbaston RMBS Holdings Ltd
3
Elland RMBS 2018 plc
3
Elland RMBS Holdings Ltd
3
Molineux RMBS 2016-1 plc
3
Molineux RMBS Holdings Ltd
3
Penarth Asset Securitisation Holdings Ltd
3
Penarth Funding 1 Ltd
3
Penarth Funding 2 Ltd
3
Penarth Master Issuer plc
3
Penarth Receivables Trustee Ltd
3
Permanent Funding (No. 1) Ltd
3
Permanent Funding (No. 2) Ltd
3
Permanent Holdings Ltd
3
Permanent Master Issuer plc
3
Permanent Mortgages Trustee Ltd
3
Name of Undertaking
Notes
HBOS plc
Subsidiaries and related undertakings
99
Permanent PECOH Holdings Ltd
3
Permanent PECOH Ltd
3
Syon Securities 2019 DAC
6
Syon Securities 2020 DAC
6
Syon Securities 2020-2 DAC
6
Name of Undertaking
Notes
Associated undertakings
The Group has a participating interest in the following undertakings.
Name of undertaking
% of share class held by immediate parent
company (or by the Group where this varies)
Registered office address
Notes
Addison Social Housing Ltd
20%
1 Bartholomew Lane, London, EC2N 2AX
i
Connery Ltd
20%
44 Esplanade, St. Helier, Jersey, JE4 9WG
&
Registered office addresses
(1) 25 Gresham Street, London, EC2V 7HN
(2) 44 Esplanade, St. Helier, Jersey, JE4 9WG
(3) 1 Bartholomew Lane, London EC2N 2AX
(4) Trinity Road, Halifax, West Yorkshire HX1 2RG
(5) The Mound, Edinburgh, EH1 1YZ
(6) 5th Floor, The Exchange, George’s Dock, IFSC, Dublin 1, Ireland
(7) Cawley House, Chester Business Park, Chester, CH4 9FB
(8) Suite 6, Rineanna House, Shannon Free Zone, Co. Clare, Ireland
(9) 1 More London Place, London, SE1 2AF
(10) 6th Floor, 125 London Wall, London EC2Y 5AS
* The undertaking does not have share capital
+ The undertaking does not have a registered office
# In relation to Subsidiary Undertakings, an undertaking external to the
  Group holds shares
& The Group holds voting rights of between 20% and 49.9%
(i) Ordinary Shares
(ii) A Ordinary Shares
(iii) B Ordinary Shares
(iv) Redeemable Preference Shares
(v) Preference Shares
(vi) C Ordinary Shares
HBOS plc
Subsidiaries and related undertakings
100